6329 lines
202 KiB
TeX
6329 lines
202 KiB
TeX
% \iffalse
|
|
%
|
|
% Copyright 2016-2018, Association for Computing Machinery
|
|
% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
|
|
% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
|
|
% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any
|
|
% later version.
|
|
% The latest version of the license is in
|
|
% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
|
|
% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of
|
|
% LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later.
|
|
%
|
|
% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'.
|
|
%
|
|
% The Current Maintainer of this work is Boris Veytsman,
|
|
% <borisv@lk.net>
|
|
%
|
|
% This work consists of the file acmart.dtx, the derived file
|
|
% acmart.cls, the files ACM-Reference-Format.bst, and templates
|
|
% sample-acmlarge.tex, sample-acmsmall.tex, sample-acmtog.tex,
|
|
% samplebody-conf.tex, samplebody-journals.tex, sample-manuscript.tex,
|
|
% sample-sigchi-a.tex, sample-sigchi.tex,
|
|
% sample-sigconf-authordraft.tex, sample-sigconf.tex,
|
|
% sample-sigplan.tex
|
|
%
|
|
% \fi
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
%% \CharacterTable
|
|
%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
|
|
%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
|
|
%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
|
|
%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
|
|
%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
|
|
%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
|
|
%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
|
|
%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
|
|
%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
|
|
%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
|
|
%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
|
|
%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
|
|
%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
|
|
%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \MakeShortVerb{|}
|
|
% \def\guide{acmguide}
|
|
% \iffalse
|
|
% From
|
|
% http://tex.stackexchange.com/questions/117892/can-i-convert-a-string-to-catcode-11 by egreg
|
|
% \fi
|
|
% \begingroup
|
|
% \everyeof{\noexpand}
|
|
% \endlinechar=-1
|
|
% \xdef\currentjob{\scantokens\expandafter{\jobname}}
|
|
% \endgroup
|
|
%
|
|
% \ifx\currentjob\guide\OnlyDescription\fi
|
|
% \GetFileInfo{acmart.dtx}
|
|
% \title{\LaTeX{} Class for the \emph{Association for Computing
|
|
% Machinery}\thanks{\copyright 2016--2018, Association for Computing Machinery}}
|
|
% \author{Boris Veytsman\thanks{%
|
|
% \href{mailto:borisv@lk.net}{\texttt{borisv@lk.net}},
|
|
% \href{mailto:boris@varphi.com}{\texttt{boris@varphi.com}}}}
|
|
% \date{\filedate, \fileversion}
|
|
% \maketitle
|
|
% \begin{abstract}
|
|
% This package provides a class for typesetting publications of
|
|
% the Association for Computing Machinery.
|
|
% \end{abstract}
|
|
% \tableofcontents
|
|
%
|
|
% \clearpage
|
|
%
|
|
%\section{Introduction}
|
|
%\label{sec:intro}
|
|
%
|
|
% The Association for Computing
|
|
% Machinery\footnote{\url{http://www.acm.org/}} is the world's largest
|
|
% educational and scientific computing society, which delivers
|
|
% resources that advance computing as a science and a
|
|
% profession. It was one of the
|
|
% early adopters of \TeX\ for its typesetting.
|
|
%
|
|
% It provided several different classes for a number of journals and
|
|
% conference proceedings. Unfortunately during the years since these
|
|
% classes were written, the code was patched many times, and
|
|
% supporting different versions of the classes became difficult.
|
|
%
|
|
% This package provides the uniform interface for all ACM
|
|
% publications. It is intended to replace all the different classes and
|
|
% packages and provide an up-to-date \LaTeX\ package.
|
|
%
|
|
% This package uses only free \TeX\ packages and fonts included in \TeX
|
|
% Live, Mik\TeX\ and other popular \TeX\ distributions. It is
|
|
% intended to be published in these distributions itself, which
|
|
% minimizes users' efforts in the installation and support of this
|
|
% package.
|
|
%
|
|
% I am grateful to
|
|
% Michael D.~Adams,
|
|
% Leif Andersen,
|
|
% Dirk Beyer,
|
|
% Benjamin Byholm,
|
|
% Michael Ekstrand,
|
|
% Matthew Fluet,
|
|
% Paolo G.~Giarrusso,
|
|
% Ben Greenman,
|
|
% Jamie Davis,
|
|
% LianTze Lim,
|
|
% Ben Liblit,
|
|
% Kai Mindermann,
|
|
% Frank Mittelbach,
|
|
% Serguei Mokhov,
|
|
% Ross Moore,
|
|
% John Owens,
|
|
% Joel Nider,
|
|
% Tobias Pape,
|
|
% Mathias Rav,
|
|
% Andreas Reichinger,
|
|
% Matteo Riondato,
|
|
% Craig Rodkin,
|
|
% Bernard Rous,
|
|
% David Shamma,
|
|
% Stephen Spencer,
|
|
% Daniel Thomas,
|
|
% Zack Weinberg,
|
|
% John Wickerson
|
|
% and many others for their invaluable help.
|
|
%
|
|
% The development version of the package is available at
|
|
% \url{https://github.com/borisveytsman/acmart}.
|
|
%
|
|
%\section{User's guide}
|
|
%\label{sec:ug}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% This class uses many commands and customizaton options, so it might
|
|
% appear intimidating for a casual user. Do not panic! Many of these
|
|
% commands and options can be safely left with their default values
|
|
% or the values recommended by your conference or journal editors. If
|
|
% you have problems or questions, do not hesitate to ask me directly
|
|
% or the community at \url{https://github.com/borisveytsman/acmart},
|
|
% \url{https://tex.stackexchange.com} or the closest \TeX\ Users
|
|
% Group. The world-wide \TeX\ Users Group is at
|
|
% \url{https://tug.org/}; please consider joining us if you use \TeX\
|
|
% regularly.
|
|
%
|
|
%\subsection{Installation}
|
|
%\label{sec:ug_install}
|
|
%
|
|
% Most probably, you already have this package installed in your
|
|
% favorite \TeX\ distribution; if not, you may want to upgrade. You
|
|
% may need to upgrade it anyway since this package uses a number of
|
|
% relatively recent packages, especially the ones related to fonts.
|
|
%
|
|
% The latest released version of this package can be found on CTAN:
|
|
% \url{https://www.ctan.org/pkg/acmart}. The development version can
|
|
% be found on GitHub: \url{https://github.com/borisveytsman/acmart}.
|
|
% At this address you can file a bug report---or even contribute your
|
|
% own enhancement by making a pull request.
|
|
%
|
|
% Please note that the version on Github is a development (or
|
|
% experimental) version: please download it for testing new features.
|
|
% The production version is the one on CTAN and ACM sites.
|
|
%
|
|
% Most users should not attempt to install this package themselves
|
|
% but should rather rely on their \TeX\ distributions to provide it. If you
|
|
% decide to install the package yourself, follow the standard rules:
|
|
% \begin{enumerate}
|
|
% \item Run |latex acmart.ins|. This will produce the file
|
|
% |acmart.cls|
|
|
% \item Put the files |acmart.cls| and |ACM-Reference-Format.bst|
|
|
% in places where \LaTeX{} can find them (see \cite{TeXFAQ} or
|
|
% the documentation for your \TeX{} system).\label{item:install}
|
|
% \item Update the database of file names. Again, see \cite{TeXFAQ}
|
|
% or the documentation for your \TeX{} system for the system-specific
|
|
% details.\label{item:update}
|
|
% \item The file |acmart.pdf| provides the documentation for the
|
|
% package. (This is probably the file you are reading now.)
|
|
% \end{enumerate}
|
|
% As an alternative to items~\ref{item:install} and~\ref{item:update}
|
|
% you can just put the files in the working directory where your
|
|
% |.tex| file is.
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% This class uses a number of other packages. They are included in all
|
|
% major \TeX\ distributions (\TeX Live, Mac\TeX, Mik\TeX) of 2015 and
|
|
% later, so you probably have them installed. Just in case here is
|
|
% the list of these packages:
|
|
% \begin{itemize}
|
|
% \item \textsl{amscls}, \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/amscls}
|
|
% \item \textsl{amsfonts}, \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/amsfonts}
|
|
% \item \textsl{amsmath}, \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/amsmath}
|
|
% \item \textsl{binhex}, \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/binhex}
|
|
% \item \textsl{caption}, \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/caption}
|
|
% \item \textsl{comment}, \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/comment}
|
|
% \item \textsl{cm-super}, \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/cm-super}
|
|
% \item \textsl{cmap}, \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/cmap}
|
|
% \item \textsl{draftwatermark}, \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/draftwatermark}
|
|
% \item \textsl{environ}, \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/environ}
|
|
% \item \textsl{etoolbox}, \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/etoolbox}
|
|
% \item \textsl{fancyhdr}, \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/fancyhdr}
|
|
% \item \textsl{float}, \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/float}
|
|
% \item \textsl{fontaxes}, \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/fontaxes}
|
|
% \item \textsl{geometry}, \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/geometry}
|
|
% \item \textsl{graphics}, \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/graphics}
|
|
% \item \textsl{hyperref}, \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref}
|
|
% \item \textsl{ifluatex}, \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/ifluatex}
|
|
% \item \textsl{ifxetex}, \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/ifxetex}
|
|
% \item \textsl{inconsolata}, \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/inconsolata}
|
|
% \item \textsl{libertine}, \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/libertine}
|
|
% \item \textsl{manyfoot}, \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/manyfoot}
|
|
% \item \textsl{microtype}, \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/microtype}
|
|
% \item \textsl{mmap}, \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/mmap}
|
|
% \item \textsl{ms}, \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/ms}
|
|
% \item \textsl{mweights}, \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/mweights}
|
|
% \item \textsl{natbib}, \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/natbib}
|
|
% \item \textsl{nccfoots}, \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/nccfoots}
|
|
% \item \textsl{newtx}, \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/newtx}
|
|
% \item \textsl{oberdiek}, \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/oberdiek}
|
|
% \item \textsl{pdftex-def}, \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/pdftex-def}
|
|
% \item \textsl{refcount}, \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/refcount}
|
|
% \item \textsl{setspace}, \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/setspace}
|
|
% \item \textsl{textcase}, \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/textcase}
|
|
% \item \textsl{totpages}, \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/totpages}
|
|
% \item \textsl{trimspaces}, \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/trimspaces}
|
|
% \item \textsl{upquote}, \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/upquote}
|
|
% \item \textsl{url}, \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/url}
|
|
% \item \textsl{xcolor}, \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/xcolor}
|
|
% \item \textsl{xkeyval}, \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/xkeyval}
|
|
% \item \textsl{xstring}, \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/xstring}
|
|
% \end{itemize}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
%\subsection{Invocation and options}
|
|
%\label{sec:invocation}
|
|
%
|
|
% To use this class, put in the preamble of your document
|
|
% \begin{quote}
|
|
% \cs{documentclass}\oarg{options}|{acmart}|
|
|
% \end{quote}
|
|
% There are several options corresponding to the type of the document and
|
|
% its general appearance. They are described below. Generally
|
|
% speaking, the options have |key=value| forms, for example,
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% \documentclass[format=acmsmall, screen=true, review=false]{acmart}
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% The option |format| describes the format of the output. There are
|
|
% several possible values for this option, for example,
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% \documentclass[format=acmtog]{acmart}
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
% Actually the words |format=| can be omitted, e.g.,
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% \documentclass[acmtog, review=false]{acmart}
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
% The possible formats are listed in
|
|
% Table~\ref{tab:opts_format}. Note that formats starting with |acm|
|
|
% are intended for journals and transactions, while formats starting
|
|
% with |sig| are intended for proceedings published as books.
|
|
%
|
|
% Note that sometimes conference proceedings are published as a
|
|
% special issue (or issues) of an ACM journal. In this case, you
|
|
% should use the journal format for a conference paper. Please
|
|
% contact your conference committee if in doubt.
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{table}
|
|
% \centering
|
|
% \caption{The possible values for the \texttt{format} option}
|
|
% \label{tab:opts_format}
|
|
% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{>{\ttfamily}lX}
|
|
% \toprule
|
|
% \normalfont Value & Meaning\\
|
|
% \midrule
|
|
% manuscript & A manuscript. This is the default. \\
|
|
% acmsmall & Small single-column format. Used for CIE, CSUR, DTRAP,
|
|
% JACM, JDIQ, JEA, JERIC,
|
|
% JETC, PACMHCI, PACMPL, TAAS, TACCESS, TACO, TALG, TALLIP (formerly TALIP), TCPS,
|
|
% TEAC, TECS, THRI, TIIS, TISSEC, TIST, TKDD, TMIS, TOCE, TOCHI, TOCL,
|
|
% TOCS, TOCT, TODAES, TODS, TOIS, TOIT, TOMACS, TOMM (formerly
|
|
% TOMCCAP), TOMPECS, TOMS, TOPC, TOPLAS, TOPS,
|
|
% TOS, TOSEM, TOSN, TRETS,
|
|
% TSAS, TSC, TSLP and TWEB, including special issues. \\
|
|
% acmlarge & Large single-column format. Used for
|
|
% IMWUT, JOCCH, POMACS and TAP, including special issues. \\
|
|
% acmtog & Large double-column format. Used for
|
|
% TOG, including annual conference Technical Papers.\\
|
|
% sigconf & Proceedings format for most ACM
|
|
% conferences (with the exceptions listed below) and all ICPS
|
|
% volumes.\\
|
|
% sigplan & Proceedings format for SIGPLAN conferences.\\
|
|
% sigchi & Proceedings format for SIGCHI conferences.\\
|
|
% sigchi-a & Format for SIGCHI extended abstracts.\\
|
|
% \bottomrule
|
|
% \end{tabularx}
|
|
% \end{table}
|
|
%
|
|
% There are several Boolean options that can take |true| or |false|
|
|
% values. They are listed in Table~\ref{tab:opts_bool}. The words
|
|
% |=true| can be omitted when setting a Boolean option, so instead of
|
|
% |screen=true| one can write just |screen|, for example,
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% \documentclass[acmsmall, screen, review]{acmart}
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
% The option |review| is useful when combined with the |manuscript| format
|
|
% option. It provides a version suitable for reviewers and
|
|
% copy editors.
|
|
%
|
|
% The default for the option |screen| depends on the publication. At
|
|
% present it is |false| for all publications \emph{but} PACM, since
|
|
% PACM is now electronic-only. Thus PACM titles~(see
|
|
% Table~\ref{tab:pubs}) set this option to |true|. In the future this
|
|
% option may involve additional features suitable for on-screen
|
|
% versions of articles.
|
|
%
|
|
% The option |natbib| is used when the corresponding
|
|
% \BibTeX\ style is based on |natbib|. In most cases you do not need
|
|
% to set it. See
|
|
% Section~\ref{sec:ug_bibliography}.
|
|
%
|
|
% The option |anonymous| is used
|
|
% for anonymous review processes and causes all author information to be
|
|
% obscured.
|
|
%
|
|
% The option |timestamp| is used to include a time stamp in the
|
|
% footer of each page. When preparing a document, this can help avoid
|
|
% confusing different revisions. The footer also includes the page range of
|
|
% the document. This helps detect missing pages in hard copies.
|
|
%
|
|
% The option |authordraft| is intended for author's drafts that are not
|
|
% intended for distribution. It typesets a copyright block to give the
|
|
% author an idea of its size and the overall size of the paper but
|
|
% overprints it with the phrase ``Unpublished working draft. Not for
|
|
% distribution.'', which is also used as a watermark. This option sets
|
|
% |timestamp| and |review| to |true|, but these can be
|
|
% overriden by setting these options to |false| \emph{after}
|
|
% setting |authordraft| to |true|.
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{table}
|
|
% \centering
|
|
% \caption{Boolean options}
|
|
% \label{tab:opts_bool}
|
|
% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{>{\ttfamily}l>{\ttfamily}lX}
|
|
% \toprule
|
|
% \normalfont Option & \normalfont Default & Meaning\\
|
|
% \midrule
|
|
% review & false & A review version: lines are numbered and
|
|
% hyperlinks are colored\\
|
|
% screen & {\rmfamily see text} & A screen version:
|
|
% hyperlinks are colored\\
|
|
% natbib & true & Whether to use the |natbib| package (see
|
|
% Section~\ref{sec:ug_bibliography})\\
|
|
% anonymous & false & Whether to make author(s) anonymous\\
|
|
% authorversion & false & Whether to generate a special
|
|
% version for the authors' personal use or posting (see
|
|
% Section~\ref{sec:ug_topmatter})\\
|
|
% timestamp & false & Whether to put a time stamp in the
|
|
% footer of each page\\
|
|
% authordraft & false & Whether author's-draft mode is enabled\\
|
|
% acmthm & true & Whether to define theorem-like environments, see
|
|
% Section~\ref{sec:ug_theorems}\\
|
|
% \bottomrule
|
|
% \end{tabularx}
|
|
% \end{table}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
%\subsection{Top matter}
|
|
%\label{sec:ug_topmatter}
|
|
%
|
|
% A number of commands set up \emph{top matter} or (in
|
|
% computer science jargon) \emph{metadata} for an article. They
|
|
% establish the publication name, article title, authors, DOI and
|
|
% other data. Some of these commands, like \cs{title} and \cs{author},
|
|
% should be put by the authors. Others, like \cs{acmVolume} and
|
|
% \cs{acmDOI}---by the editors. Below we describe these commands and
|
|
% mention who should issue them. These macros should be used
|
|
% \emph{before} the \cs{maketitle} command. Note that in previous
|
|
% versions of ACM classes some of these commands should be used before
|
|
% \cs{maketitle}, and some after it. Now they all must be used before
|
|
% \cs{maketitle}.
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% This class internally loads the |amsart| class, so many top-matter
|
|
% commands are inherited from |amsart|~\cite{Downes04:amsart}.
|
|
%
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\acmJournal}%
|
|
% The macro \cs{acmJournal}\marg{shortName} sets the name of the
|
|
% journal or transaction for journals and transactions. The argument
|
|
% is the short name of the publication \emph{in uppercase}, for
|
|
% example,
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% \acmJournal{TOMS}
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
% The currently recognized journals are listed in
|
|
% Table~\ref{tab:pubs}. Note that conference proceedings published in
|
|
% \emph{book} form do not set this macro.
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{table}
|
|
% \centering
|
|
% \caption{ACM publications and arguments of the \cs{acmJournal}
|
|
% command}\footnotesize
|
|
% \label{tab:pubs}
|
|
% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{>{\ttfamily}lX}
|
|
% \toprule
|
|
% \normalfont Abbreviation & Publication \\
|
|
% \midrule
|
|
% CIE & ACM Computers in Entertainment \\
|
|
% CSUR & ACM Computing Surveys\\
|
|
% DTRAP & Digital Threats: Research and Practice\\
|
|
% IMWUT & PACM on Interactive, Mobile, Wearable and Ubiquitous
|
|
% Technologies\\
|
|
% JACM & Journal of the ACM \\
|
|
% JDIQ & ACM Journal of Data and Information Quality \\
|
|
% JEA & ACM Journal of Experimental Algorithmics \\
|
|
% JERIC & ACM Journal of Educational Resources in Computing\\
|
|
% JETC & ACM Journal on Emerging Technologies in Computing Systems \\
|
|
% JOCCH & ACM Journal on Computing and Cultural Heritage \\
|
|
% PACMHCI & PACM on Human-Computer Interaction\\
|
|
% PACMPL & PACM on Programming Languages \\
|
|
% POMACS & PACM on Measurement and Analysis of Computing Systems \\
|
|
% TAAS & ACM Transactions on Autonomous and Adaptive Systems\\
|
|
% TACCESS & ACM Transactions on Accessible Computing\\
|
|
% TACO & ACM Transactions on Architecture and Code Optimization \\
|
|
% TALG & ACM Transactions on Algorithms \\
|
|
% TALLIP & ACM Transactions on Asian and Low-Resource Language
|
|
% Information Processing\\
|
|
% TAP & ACM Transactions on Applied Perception \\
|
|
% TCPS & ACM Transactions on Cyber-Physical Systems\\
|
|
% TEAC & ACM Transactions on Economics and Computation\\
|
|
% TECS & ACM Transactions on Embedded Computing Systems \\
|
|
% THRI & ACM Transactions on Human-Robot Interaction\\
|
|
% TIIS & ACM Transactions on Interactive Intelligent Systems\\
|
|
% TISSEC & ACM Transactions on Information and System Security\\
|
|
% TIST & ACM Transactions on Intelligent Systems and Technology \\
|
|
% TKDD & ACM Transactions on Knowledge Discovery from Data\\
|
|
% TMIS & ACM Transactions on Management Information Systems\\
|
|
% TOCE & ACM Transactions on Computing Education\\
|
|
% TOCHI & ACM Transactions on Computer-Human Interaction\\
|
|
% TOCL & ACM Transactions on Computational Logic\\
|
|
% TOCS & ACM Transactions on Computer Systems \\
|
|
% TOCT & ACM Transactions on Computation Theory \\
|
|
% TODAES & ACM Transactions on Design Automation of Electronic Systems\\
|
|
% TODS & ACM Transactions on Database Systems\\
|
|
% TOG & ACM Transactions on Graphics\\
|
|
% TOIS & ACM Transactions on Information Systems\\
|
|
% TOIT & ACM Transactions on Internet Technology\\
|
|
% TOMACS & ACM Transactions on Modeling and Computer Simulation \\
|
|
% TOMM & ACM Transactions on Multimedia Computing, Communications
|
|
% and Applications \\
|
|
% TOMPECS & ACM Transactions on Modeling and Performance Evaluation
|
|
% of Computing Systems\\
|
|
% TOMS & ACM Transactions on Mathematical Software\\
|
|
% TOPC & ACM Transactions on Parallel Computing\\
|
|
% TOPLAS & ACM Transactions on Programming Languages and Systems\\
|
|
% TOPS & ACM Transactions on Privacy and Security\\
|
|
% TOS & ACM Transactions on Storage\\
|
|
% TOSEM & ACM Transactions on Software Engineering and Methodology\\
|
|
% TOSN & ACM Transactions on Sensor Networks\\
|
|
% TRETS & ACM Transactions on Reconfigurable Technology and Systems\\
|
|
% TSAS & ACM Transactions on Spatial Algorithms and Systems\\
|
|
% TSC & ACM Transactions on Social Computing\\
|
|
% TSLP & ACM Transactions on Speech and Language Processing \\
|
|
% TWEB & ACM Transactions on the Web\\
|
|
% \bottomrule
|
|
% \end{tabularx}
|
|
% \end{table}
|
|
%
|
|
% It is expected that this command is inserted by the author of the
|
|
% manuscript when she decides to which journal to submit the
|
|
% manuscript.
|
|
%
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\acmConference}%
|
|
% The macro
|
|
% \cs{acmConference}\oarg{short name}\marg{name}\marg{date}\marg{venue} is
|
|
% used for conference proceedings published in the book form. The
|
|
% arguments are the following:
|
|
% \begin{description}
|
|
% \item[short name:] the abbreviated name of the conference (optional).
|
|
% \item[name:] the name of the conference.
|
|
% \item[date:] the date(s) of the conference.
|
|
% \item[venue:] the place of the conference.
|
|
% \end{description}
|
|
% Examples:
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% \acmConference[TD'15]{Technical Data Conference}{November
|
|
% 12--16}{Dallas, TX, USA}
|
|
% \acmConference{SA'15 Art Papers}{November 02--06, 2015}{Kobe, Japan}
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
%
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\acmBooktitle}%
|
|
% By default we assume that conference proceedings are published
|
|
% in the book named \emph{Proceedings of \textsc{CONFERENCE}}, where
|
|
% \textsc{CONFERENCE} is the name of the conference inferred from the
|
|
% command \cs{acmConference} above. However, sometimes the book title
|
|
% is different. The command \cs{acmBooktitle} can be used to set this
|
|
% title, for example,
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% \acmBooktitle{Companion to the first International Conference on the
|
|
% Art, Science and Engineering of Programming (Programming '17)}
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
%
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\editor}%
|
|
% In most cases, conference proceedings are edited. You can use the
|
|
% command \cs{editor}\marg{editor} to set the editor of the volume.
|
|
% This command can be repeated, for example,
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% \editor{Jennifer B. Sartor}
|
|
% \editor{Theo D'Hondt}
|
|
% \editor{Wolfgang De Meuter}
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\title}%
|
|
% The command |\title|, as in the |amsart| class, has two arguments: one
|
|
% optional, and one mandatory:
|
|
% \begin{flushleft}
|
|
% |\title[|\meta{ShortTitle}|]{|\meta{FullTitle}|}|
|
|
% \end{flushleft}
|
|
% The mandatory argument is the full title of the article. The
|
|
% optional argument, if present, defines the shorter version of the
|
|
% title for running heads. If the optional argument is absent, the
|
|
% full title is used instead.
|
|
%
|
|
% It is expected that this command is inserted by the author of the
|
|
% manuscript.
|
|
%
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\subtitle}%
|
|
% Besides title, ACM classes allow a subtitle, set with the
|
|
% \cs{subtitle}\marg{subtitle} macro.
|
|
%
|
|
% The commands for specifying authors are highly structured.
|
|
% The reason is they serve double duty: the authors' information is
|
|
% typeset in the manuscript \emph{and} is used by the metadata
|
|
% extraction tools for indexing and cataloguing. Therefore it is very
|
|
% important to follow the guidelines exactly.
|
|
%
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\author}%
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\orcid}
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\affiliation}%
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\email}%
|
|
% The basic commands are \cs{author}, \cs{orcid} (for the researchers
|
|
% registered with ORCID, \url{http://www.orcid.org/}), \cs{affiliation} and
|
|
% \cs{email}. In the simplest case, you enter them in this order:
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% \author{...}
|
|
% \orcid{...}
|
|
% \affiliation{...}
|
|
% \email{...}
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
% Do \emph{not} use the \LaTeX\ \cs{and} macro! Each author deserves
|
|
% his or her own \cs{author} command.
|
|
%
|
|
% Note that some formats do not typset e-mails or ORCID identifiers.
|
|
% Do not worry: the metadata tools will get them.
|
|
%
|
|
% Sometimes an author has several affiliations. In this case, the
|
|
% \cs{affiliation} command should be repeated:
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% \author{...}
|
|
% \orcid{...}
|
|
% \affiliation{...}
|
|
% \affiliation{...}
|
|
% \email{...}
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
% Similarly you can repeat the \cs{email} command.
|
|
%
|
|
% You may have several authors with the same affiliation, different
|
|
% affiliations, or overlapping affiliations (author~$A_1$ is affiliated
|
|
% with institutions $I_1$ and $I_2$, while author $A_2$ is affiliated
|
|
% with $I_2$ only, author $A_3$ is affiliated with
|
|
% $I_1$ and $I_3$, etc.). The recommended solution is to put the
|
|
% \cs{affiliation} commands after each author, possibly repeating them:
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% \author{...}
|
|
% \orcid{...}
|
|
% \affiliation{...}
|
|
% \affiliation{...}
|
|
% \email{...}
|
|
% \author{...}
|
|
% \orcid{...}
|
|
% \affiliation{...}
|
|
% \email{...}
|
|
% \author{...}
|
|
% \orcid{...}
|
|
% \affiliation{...}
|
|
% \affiliation{...}
|
|
% \email{...}
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
% In some cases, when several authors share the same affiliation, you can
|
|
% try to save space using the format
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% \author{...}
|
|
% \email{...}
|
|
% \author{...}
|
|
% \email{...}
|
|
% \affiliation{...}
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
% However, this format is not generally recommended.
|
|
%
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\additionalaffiliation}%
|
|
% In some cases, too many affiliations can take too much space. The
|
|
% command \cs{additionalaffiliation}\marg{affiliation} creates a
|
|
% footnote after an author's name with the words ``Also with
|
|
% \marg{affiliation}''. You should use this command only as a last
|
|
% resort. An example of usage is:
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% \author{G. Tobin}
|
|
% \author{Ben Trovato}
|
|
% \additionalaffiliation{%
|
|
% \institution{The Th{\o}rv{\"a}ld Group}
|
|
% \streetaddress{1 Th{\o}rv{\"a}ld Circle}
|
|
% \city{Hekla}
|
|
% \country{Iceland}}
|
|
% \affiliation{%
|
|
% \institution{Institute for Clarity in Documentation}
|
|
% \streetaddress{P.O. Box 1212}
|
|
% \city{Dublin}
|
|
% \state{Ohio}
|
|
% \postcode{43017-6221}}
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
% Here Trovato and Tobin share their affiliation with the Institute
|
|
% for Clarity in Documentation, but only Ben Trovato is affiliated
|
|
% with The Th{\o}rv{\"a}ld Group.
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\position}%
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\institution}%
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\department}%
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\streetaddress}%
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\city}%
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\state}%
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\postcode}%
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\country}%
|
|
% The \cs{affiliation} and \cs{additionalaffiliation} commands are
|
|
% further structured to interact with the metadata extraction tools.
|
|
% Inside these commands you should use the \cs{position},
|
|
% \cs{institution}, \cs{department}, \cs{city}, \cs{streetaddress},
|
|
% \cs{state}, \cs{postcode} and \cs{country} macros to indicate the
|
|
% corresponding parts of the affiliation. Note that in some cases
|
|
% (for example, journals) these parts are not printed in the resulting
|
|
% copy, but they \emph{are} necessary since they are used by the XML
|
|
% metadata extraction programs. Do \emph{not} put commas or |\\|
|
|
% between the elements of \cs{affiliation}. They will be provided
|
|
% automatically.
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% An example of the author block:
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% \author{A. U. Thor}
|
|
% \orcid{1234-4564-1234-4565}
|
|
% \affiliation{%
|
|
% \institution{University of New South Wales}
|
|
% \department{School of Biomedical Engineering}
|
|
% \streetaddress{Samuels Building (F25), Kensington Campus}
|
|
% \city{Sidney}
|
|
% \state{NSW}
|
|
% \postcode{2052}
|
|
% \country{Australia}}
|
|
% \email{author@nsw.au.edu}
|
|
% \author{A. N. Other}
|
|
% \affiliation{%
|
|
% \institution{University of New South Wales}
|
|
% \city{Sidney}
|
|
% \state{NSW}
|
|
% \country{Australia}}
|
|
% \author{C. O. Respondent}
|
|
% \orcid{1234-4565-4564-1234}
|
|
% \affiliation{%
|
|
% \institution{University of Pennsylvania}
|
|
% \city{Philadelphia}
|
|
% \state{PA}
|
|
% \country{USA}}
|
|
% \affiliation{%
|
|
% \institution{University of New South Wales}
|
|
% \city{Sidney}
|
|
% \state{NSW}
|
|
% \country{Australia}}
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
%
|
|
% Note that the old ACM conference formats did not allow more than six
|
|
% authors and required some effort from authors to achieve
|
|
% alignment. The new format is much better in this.
|
|
%
|
|
% Sometimes an author works in several departments within the same
|
|
% insitution. There could be two situations: the departments are
|
|
% independent, or one department is within another. In the first
|
|
% case, just repeat the command \cs{department} several times. To
|
|
% handle the second case the command has an optional numerical
|
|
% parameter. The departments with higher numbers are higher in the
|
|
% organizational chart. Compare
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% \affiliation{%
|
|
% \department[0]{Department of Lunar Studies} % 0 is the default
|
|
% \department[1]{John Doe Institute} % higher than 0
|
|
% \institution{University of San Serriffe}
|
|
% \country{San Serriffe}}
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
% and
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% \affiliation{%
|
|
% \department{Department of Lunar Studies} % Not in the John Doe Institute!
|
|
% \department{John Doe Institute}
|
|
% \institution{University of San Serriffe}
|
|
% \country{San Serriffe}}
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% The command \cs{affiliation} formats its output according to
|
|
% American conventions. This might be wrong for some cases.
|
|
% Consider, for example, a German address. In Germany, the postcode is
|
|
% put before the city and is not separated by a comma. We can handle this
|
|
% order using
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% \affiliation{%
|
|
% \institution{Fluginstitut}
|
|
% \streetaddress{Sonnenallee 17}
|
|
% \postcode{123456}
|
|
% \city{Helm}
|
|
% \country{Germany}}
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
% However, the comma after the postcode is unfortunate: the address will
|
|
% be typeset (in some formats) as
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% Fluginstitut
|
|
% Sonenallee 17
|
|
% 123456, Helm, Germany
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% To overcome this problem, the command \cs{affiliation} has an
|
|
% optional parameter |obeypunctuation|, which can be |false| (the
|
|
% default) or |true|. If this parameter is |true|, \cs{afffiliation}
|
|
% obeys the author's command. Thus
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% \affiliation[obeypunctuation=true]{%
|
|
% \institution{Fluginstitut}\\
|
|
% \streetaddress{Sonnenallee 17}\\
|
|
% \postcode{123456}
|
|
% \city{Helm},
|
|
% \country{Germany}}
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
% will be typeset as
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% Fluginstitut
|
|
% Sonenallee 17
|
|
% 123456 Helm, Germany
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
%
|
|
% Note that you should \emph{not} use this option for journals.
|
|
%
|
|
% It is expected that these commands are inserted by the author of the
|
|
% manuscript.
|
|
%
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\thanks}%
|
|
% Like |amsart| (and unlike standard \LaTeX{}), we allow
|
|
% |\thanks| only \emph{outside} of the commands |\title| and |\author|.
|
|
% This command is obsolete and should \emph{not} be used in most
|
|
% cases. Do not list your acknowledgments or grant sponsors here.
|
|
% Put this information in the |acks| environment (see
|
|
% Section~\ref{sec:ug_acks}).
|
|
%
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\authorsaddresses}%
|
|
% In some formats, addresses are printed as a footnote on the first
|
|
% page. By default \LaTeX\ typesets them itself using the information
|
|
% you give it. However, you can override its choice using the
|
|
% commmand \cs{authorsaddresses}\marg{contact addresses}, for example,
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% \authorsaddresses{%
|
|
% Authors' addresses: G.~Zhou, Computer Science Department, College of
|
|
% William and Mary, 104 Jameson Rd, Williamsburg, PA 23185, US;
|
|
% V.~B\'eranger, Inria Paris-Rocquencourt, Rocquencourt, France;
|
|
% A.~Patel, Rajiv Gandhi University, Rono-Hills, Doimukh, Arunachal
|
|
% Pradesh, India; H.~Chan, Tsinghua University, 30 Shuangqing Rd,
|
|
% Haidian Qu, Beijing Shi, China; T.~Yan, Eaton Innovation Center,
|
|
% Prague, Czech Republic; T.~He, C.~Huang, J.~A.~Stankovic University
|
|
% of Virginia, School of Engineering Charlottesville, VA 22903, USA;
|
|
% T. F. Abdelzaher, (Current address) NASA Ames Research Center,
|
|
% Moffett Field, California 94035.}
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
% You can \emph{suppress} printing authors' addresses by setting them
|
|
% to an empty string: |\authorsaddresses{}|.
|
|
%
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\titlenote}%
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\subtitlenote}%
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\authornote}%
|
|
% While the command \cs{thanks} generates a note without a footnote
|
|
% mark, sometimes the authors might need notes more tightly connected
|
|
% to the title, subtitle or author. The commands \cs{titlenote},
|
|
% \cs{subtitlenote} and \cs{authornote} that follow the corresponding
|
|
% commands (\cs{title}, \cs{subtitle} and \cs{author}) generate such
|
|
% notes. For example,
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% \title{This is a title}
|
|
% \titlenote{This is a titlenote}
|
|
% \author{A. U. Thor}
|
|
% \authornote{This is an authornote}
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
%
|
|
% Please never use a \cs{footnote} inside an \cs{author} or \cs{title}
|
|
% command since this confuses the metadata extraction software. (Actually
|
|
% these commands now produce errors.)
|
|
%
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\authornotemark}%
|
|
% Sometimes one may need to have the same footnote connected to
|
|
% several authors. The command \cs{authornotemark}\oarg{number} adds
|
|
% just the footnote mark, for example,
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% \author{A. U. Thor}
|
|
% \authornote{Both authors contributed equally to the paper}
|
|
% ...
|
|
% \author{A. N. Other}
|
|
% \authornotemark[1]
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
% The correct numbering of these marks is the responsibility of the
|
|
% user.
|
|
%
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\acmVolume}%
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\acmNumber}%
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\acmArticle}%
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\acmYear}%
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\acmMonth}%
|
|
% The macros \cs{acmVolume}, \cs{acmNumber}, \cs{acmArticle},
|
|
% \cs{acmYear} and \cs{acmMonth} are inserted by the editor and set
|
|
% the journal volume, issue, article number, year and month
|
|
% corrspondingly. The arguments of all these commands, including
|
|
% \cs{acmMonth}, is numerical. For example,
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% \acmVolume{9}
|
|
% \acmNumber{4}
|
|
% \acmArticle{39}
|
|
% \acmYear{2010}
|
|
% \acmMonth{3}
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
% Note that \cs{acmArticle} is used not only for journals but also
|
|
% for some conference proceedings.
|
|
%
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\acmArticleSeq}%
|
|
% The articles in the same issue of a journal have a \emph{sequence
|
|
% number}. It is used to vertically position the black blob on the first
|
|
% page of some formats. By default it is the same as the article number,
|
|
% but the command \cs{acmArticleSeq}\marg{n} can be used to change it:
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% \acmArticle{39} % The sequence number will be 39 by default
|
|
% \acmArticleSeq{5} % We redefine it to 5
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
% Setting this number to zero suppresses the blob.
|
|
%
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\acmSubmissionID}%
|
|
% If your paper got a Submission~ID from the Conference Management
|
|
% System, put it here:
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% \acmSubmissionID{123-A56-BU3}
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\acmPrice}%
|
|
% The macro \cs{acmPrice}\marg{price} sets the price for the article,
|
|
% for example,
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% \acmPrice{25.00}
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
% Note that you do not need to put the dollar sign here, just the
|
|
% amount. By default the price is \$15.00, unless the copyright is
|
|
% set to |usgov| or |rightsretained|, when it is suppressed. Note that to
|
|
% override the defaults you need to set the price \emph{after} the
|
|
% \cs{setcopyright} command. Also, the
|
|
% command |\acmPrice{}| suppresses the printing of the price.
|
|
%
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\acmISBN}%
|
|
% Book-like volumes have ISBN numbers attached to them. The macro
|
|
% \cs{acmISBN}\marg{ISBN} sets it. Normally it is set by the
|
|
% typesetter, for example,
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% \acmISBN{978-1-4503-3916-2}
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
% Setting it to the empty string, as |\acmISBN{}|, suppresses printing the
|
|
% ISBN.
|
|
%
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\acmDOI}%
|
|
% The macro \cs{acmDOI}\marg{DOI} sets the DOI of the article, for
|
|
% example,
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% \acmDOI{10.1145/9999997.9999999}
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
% It is normally set by the typesetter. Setting it to the empty
|
|
% string, as |\acmDOI{}|, suppresses the DOI.
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\acmBadgeR}%
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\acmBadgeL}%
|
|
% Some conference articles get special distinctions, for example, the
|
|
% artifact evaluation for PPoPP~2016
|
|
% (see~\url{http://ctuning.org/ae/ppopp2016.html}). These articles
|
|
% display special badges supplied by the conference organizers. This
|
|
% class provides commands to add these badges:
|
|
% \cs{acmBadgeR}\oarg{url}\marg{graphics} and
|
|
% \cs{acmBadgeL}\oarg{url}\marg{graphics}. The first command puts the
|
|
% badge to the right of the title, and the second one---to the left.
|
|
% The exception is the |sigchi-a| mode for SIGCHI extended abstracts,
|
|
% which puts the badges on the left margin. The arguments have the
|
|
% following meaning: \oarg{url}, if provided, sets the link to the
|
|
% badge authority in the screen version, while \marg{graphics} sets
|
|
% the graphics file with the badge image. The file must be a cropped
|
|
% square, which is scaled to a standard size in the output. For
|
|
% example, if the badge image is |ae-logo.pdf|, the command is
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% \acmBadgeR[http://ctuning.org/ae/ppopp2016.html]{ae-logo}
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\startPage}%
|
|
% The macro \cs{startPage}\marg{page} sets the first page of the
|
|
% article in a journal or book. It is used by the typesetter.
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\terms}%
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\keywords}%
|
|
% The command
|
|
% \cs{keywords}\marg{keyword, keyword,\ldots} sets keywords for the
|
|
% article. They must be
|
|
% separated by commas, for example,
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% \keywords{wireless sensor networks, media access control,
|
|
% multi-channel, radio interference, time synchronization}
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
%
|
|
% \DescribeEnv{CCSXML}%
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\ccsdesc}%
|
|
% ACM publications are classified according to the ACM Computing
|
|
% Classification Scheme (CCS). CCS codes are used both in the typeset
|
|
% version of the publications \emph{and} in the metadata in various
|
|
% databases. Therefore you need to provide both \TeX\ commands and XML
|
|
% metadata with the paper.
|
|
%
|
|
% The tool at \url{http://dl.acm.org/ccs.cfm} can be used to generate
|
|
% CCS codes. After you select the topics, click on ``Generate CCS
|
|
% codes'' to get results like the following:
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% \begin{CCSXML}
|
|
% <ccs2012>
|
|
% <concept>
|
|
% <concept_id>10010520.10010553.10010562</concept_id>
|
|
% <concept_desc>Computer systems organization~Embedded systems</concept_desc>
|
|
% <concept_significance>500</concept_significance>
|
|
% </concept>
|
|
% <concept>
|
|
% <concept_id>10010520.10010575.10010755</concept_id>
|
|
% <concept_desc>Computer systems organization~Redundancy</concept_desc>
|
|
% <concept_significance>300</concept_significance>
|
|
% </concept>
|
|
% <concept>
|
|
% <concept_id>10010520.10010553.10010554</concept_id>
|
|
% <concept_desc>Computer systems organization~Robotics</concept_desc>
|
|
% <concept_significance>100</concept_significance>
|
|
% </concept>
|
|
% <concept>
|
|
% <concept_id>10003033.10003083.10003095</concept_id>
|
|
% <concept_desc>Networks~Network reliability</concept_desc>
|
|
% <concept_significance>100</concept_significance>
|
|
% </concept>
|
|
% </ccs2012>
|
|
% \end{CCSXML}
|
|
%
|
|
% \ccsdesc[500]{Computer systems organization~Embedded systems}
|
|
% \ccsdesc[300]{Computer systems organization~Redundancy}
|
|
% \ccsdesc{Computer systems organization~Robotics}
|
|
% \ccsdesc[100]{Networks~Network reliability}
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
%
|
|
% You just need to copy this code and paste it in your paper anywhere
|
|
% before \verb|\maketitle|.
|
|
%
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\setcopyright}
|
|
% There are several possibilities for the copyright of the papers
|
|
% published by the ACM: the authors may transfer the rights to the ACM,
|
|
% license them to the ACM, some or all authors might be employees of the
|
|
% US or Canadian governments, etc. Accordingly the command
|
|
% \verb|\setcopyright{...}| is introduced. Its argument is the
|
|
% copyright status of the paper, for example,
|
|
% \verb|\setcopyright{acmcopyright}|. The possible values for this
|
|
% command are listed in Table~\ref{tab:setcopyright}.
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{table}
|
|
% \centering
|
|
% \caption{Parameters for the \texttt{\textbackslash setcopyright} command}
|
|
% \label{tab:setcopyright}
|
|
% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{lX}
|
|
% \toprule
|
|
% Parameter & Meaning\\
|
|
% \midrule
|
|
% \texttt{none} & The copyright and permission information is not
|
|
% typeset. (This is the option for some ACM conferences.) \\
|
|
% \texttt{acmcopyright} & The authors transfer the copyright to the
|
|
% ACM (the ``traditional'' choice).\\
|
|
% \texttt{acmlicensed} & The authors retain the copyright but
|
|
% license the publication rights to the ACM\@. \\
|
|
% \texttt{rightsretained} & The authors retain the copyright and
|
|
% publication rights to themselves or somebody else. \\
|
|
% \texttt{usgov} & All the authors are employees of the US
|
|
% government. \\
|
|
% \texttt{usgovmixed} & Some authors are employees of the US
|
|
% government. \\
|
|
% \texttt{cagov} & All the authors are employees of the Canadian
|
|
% government. \\
|
|
% \texttt{cagovmixed} & Some authors are employees of the Canadian
|
|
% government. \\
|
|
% \texttt{licensedusgovmixed} & Some authors are employees of the US
|
|
% government, and the publication rights are licensed to the ACM\@. \\
|
|
% \texttt{licensedcagov} & All the authors are employees of the Canadian
|
|
% government, and the publication rights are licensed to the ACM\@. \\
|
|
% \texttt{licensedcagovmixed} & Some authors are employees of the
|
|
% Canadian
|
|
% government, and the publication rights are licensed to the ACM\@. \\
|
|
% \texttt{othergov} & Authors are employees of a
|
|
% government other than the US or Canada. \\
|
|
% \texttt{licensedothergov} & Authors are employees of a
|
|
% government other than the US or Canada, and the publication rights
|
|
% are licensed to the ACM\@. \\
|
|
% \texttt{iw3c2w3} & Special statement for conferences organized
|
|
% by IW3C2.\\
|
|
% \texttt{iw3c2w3g} & Special statement for conferences organized
|
|
% by IW3C2, when some authors are approved Google employees.\\
|
|
% \bottomrule
|
|
% \end{tabularx}
|
|
% \end{table}
|
|
% The ACM submission software should generate the right command for you
|
|
% to paste into your file.
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\copyrightyear}%
|
|
% Each copyright statement must have the year of copyright. By
|
|
% default it is the same as \cs{acmYear}, but you can override this
|
|
% using the macro \cs{copyrightyear}, e.g.,
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% \acmYear{2016}
|
|
% \copyrightyear{2015}
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
%
|
|
% There is a special case for a personal copy that the authors may be
|
|
% allowed to generate for their use or a posting on a personal site
|
|
% (check the instructions for the specific journal or conference for
|
|
% the details). The document option |authorversion=true| produces a
|
|
% special form of the copyright statement for this case. Note that
|
|
% you still need the \cs{setcopyright} command and (optionally)
|
|
% \cs{copyrightyear} command to tell \TeX\ about the copyright owner and
|
|
% year. Also, you should be aware that due to the different sizes of
|
|
% the permssion blocks for the printed version and authors' version,
|
|
% the page breaks might be different between them.
|
|
%
|
|
% \DescribeEnv{abstract}%
|
|
% The environment |abstract| must \emph{precede} the \cs{maketitle}
|
|
% command. Again, this is different from the standard \LaTeX.
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \DescribeEnv{teaserfigure}%
|
|
% A special kind of figure is used for many two-column conference
|
|
% proceedings. This figure is placed just after the authors but
|
|
% before the main text. The environment |teaserfigure| is used for these
|
|
% figures. This environment must be used \emph{before}
|
|
% \cs{maketitle}, for example,
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% \begin{teaserfigure}
|
|
% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{sampleteaser}
|
|
% \caption{This is a teaser}
|
|
% \label{fig:teaser}
|
|
% \end{teaserfigure}
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\settopmatter}%
|
|
% Some information in the top matter is printed for certain journals
|
|
% or proceedings and suppressed for others. You can override these
|
|
% defaults using the command \cs{settopmatter}\marg{settings}. The
|
|
% settings and their meanings are listed in
|
|
% Table~\ref{tab:settopmatter}. For example,
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% \settopmatter{printacmref=false, printccs=true, printfolios=true}
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
% The parameter |authorsperrow| requires some explanation. In
|
|
% conference proceedings authors' information is typeset in boxes,
|
|
% several boxes per row (see |sample-sigconf.pdf|,
|
|
% |sample-sigplan.pdf|, etc.). The number of boxes per row is
|
|
% determined automatically. If you want to override this,
|
|
% you can do it using this parameter, for example,
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% \settopmatter{authorsperrow=4}
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
% However, in most cases you should \emph{not} do this and should use the
|
|
% default settings. Setting |authorsperrow| to $0$ will revert it to the
|
|
% default settings.
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{table}
|
|
% \centering
|
|
% \caption{Settings for the \cs{settopmatter} command}
|
|
% \label{tab:settopmatter}
|
|
% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{llX}
|
|
% \toprule
|
|
% Parameter & Values & Meaning\\
|
|
% \midrule
|
|
% |printccs| & true/false & Whether to print CCS categories\\
|
|
% |printacmref| & true/false & Whether to print the ACM bibliographic
|
|
% entry\\
|
|
% |printfolios| & true/false & Whether to print page numbers
|
|
% (folios)\\
|
|
% |authorsperrow| & numeric & Number of authors per row for the title
|
|
% page in
|
|
% conference proceedings formats\\
|
|
% \bottomrule
|
|
% \end{tabularx}
|
|
% \end{table}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\received}%
|
|
% The command \cs{received}\oarg{stage}\marg{date} sets the history of
|
|
% the publication. The~\oarg{stage} argument is optional; the default
|
|
% is |Received| for the first date and |revised| for the subsequent
|
|
% ones. For example,
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% \received{February 2007}
|
|
% \received[revised]{March 2009}
|
|
% \received[accepted]{June 2009}
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\maketitle}%
|
|
% The macro \cs{maketitle} must be the last command in the top-matter
|
|
% group. That is it must follow the commands defined in this section.
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\shortauthors}%
|
|
% \emph{After} the command \cs{maketitle}, the macro \cs{shortauthors}
|
|
% stores the names of the authors for the running head. You can
|
|
% redefine it if the list of author's name is too long, e.g.,
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% \maketitle
|
|
% \renewcommand{\shortauthors}{Zhou et al.}
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
%\subsection{Algorithms}
|
|
%\label{sec:ug_algorithms}
|
|
%
|
|
% There are now several good packages for typesetting
|
|
% algorithms~\cite{Fiorio15, Brito09, Heinz15}, and the authors are
|
|
% free to choose their favorite one.
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
%\subsection{Figures and tables}
|
|
%\label{sec:ug_floats}
|
|
%
|
|
% The new ACM styles use the standard \LaTeX\ interface for figures and
|
|
% tables. There are some important items to be aware of, however.
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{enumerate}
|
|
% \item The captions for figures must be entered \emph{after} the
|
|
% figure bodies and for tables \emph{before} the table bodies.
|
|
% \item The ACM uses the standard types for figures and tables and adds
|
|
% several new ones. In total there are the following types:
|
|
% \begin{description}
|
|
% \item[figure, table:] a standard figure or table taking a full text
|
|
% width in one-column formats and one column width in two-column formats.
|
|
% \item[figure*, table*] in two-column formats, a special figure or
|
|
% table taking a full text width.
|
|
% \item[teaserfigure:] a special figure before \cs{maketitle}.
|
|
% \item[sidebar, marginfigure, margintable:] in the |sigchi-a| format,
|
|
% special sidebars, tables and figures in the margin.
|
|
% \end{description}
|
|
%
|
|
% \item Accordingly, when scaling images, one should use the
|
|
% following sizes:
|
|
% \begin{enumerate}
|
|
% \item For |teaserfigure|, |figure| in one-column mode or |figure*| in
|
|
% two-column mode, use \cs{textwidth}. In one-column mode, you can also
|
|
% use \cs{columnwidth}, which coincides with \cs{textwidth} in this
|
|
% case.
|
|
% \item For |figure| in two-column mode, use \cs{columnwidth}.
|
|
% \item For |marginfigure|, use \cs{marginparwidth}.
|
|
% \item For |figure*| in SIGCHI extended
|
|
% abstracts, use \cs{fulltextwidth}.
|
|
% \end{enumerate}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{enumerate}
|
|
%
|
|
% It is strongly recommended to use the package |booktabs|~\cite{Fear05}
|
|
% and follow its main principles of typography with respect to tables:
|
|
% \begin{enumerate}
|
|
% \item Never, ever use vertical rules.
|
|
% \item Never use double rules.
|
|
% \end{enumerate}
|
|
% It is also a good idea not to overuse horizontal rules.
|
|
%
|
|
% For table \emph{footnotes} you have several options described in the TeX
|
|
% FAQ~\cite{TeXFAQ}. The simplest one is to use a \cs{minipage}
|
|
% environment:
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% \begin{table}
|
|
% \caption{Simulation Configuration}
|
|
% \label{tab:conf}
|
|
% \begin{minipage}{\columnwidth}
|
|
% \begin{center}
|
|
% \begin{tabular}{ll}
|
|
% \toprule
|
|
% TERRAIN\footnote{This is a table footnote. This is a
|
|
% table footnote. This is a table footnote.} &
|
|
% (200\,m$\times$200\,m) Square\\
|
|
% Node Number & 289\\
|
|
% Node Placement & Uniform\\
|
|
% Application & Many-to-Many/Gossip CBR Streams\\
|
|
% Payload Size & 32 bytes\\
|
|
% Routing Layer & GF\\
|
|
% MAC Layer & CSMA/MMSN\\
|
|
% Radio Layer & RADIO-ACCNOISE\\
|
|
% Radio Bandwidth & 250Kbps\\
|
|
% Radio Range & 20m--45m\\
|
|
% \bottomrule
|
|
% \end{tabular}
|
|
% \end{center}
|
|
% \bigskip
|
|
% \footnotesize\emph{Source:} This is a table
|
|
% sourcenote. This is a table sourcenote. This is a table
|
|
% sourcenote.
|
|
%
|
|
% \emph{Note:} This is a table footnote.
|
|
% \end{minipage}
|
|
% \end{table}
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
%
|
|
% \DescribeEnv{sidebar}%
|
|
% \DescribeEnv{marginfigure}%
|
|
% \DescribeEnv{margintable}%
|
|
% SIGCHI extended abstracts use margin space extensively. This package
|
|
% provides three environments for this with optional captions:
|
|
% \begin{description}
|
|
% \item[sidebar:] textual information in the margin
|
|
% \item[marginfigure:] a figure in the margin
|
|
% \item[margintable:] a table in the margin
|
|
% \end{description}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% Tables and figures (including margin tables and margin figures) are
|
|
% by default centered. However, in some cases (for example, when you
|
|
% use several subimages per figure) you may need to override this.
|
|
% A good way to do so is to put the contents into a
|
|
% \cs{minipage} of the width \cs{columnwidth}.
|
|
%
|
|
%\subsection{Theorems}
|
|
%\label{sec:ug_theorems}
|
|
%
|
|
% The ACM classes define two theorem styles and several pre-defined
|
|
% theorem environments:
|
|
% \begin{description}
|
|
% \item[acmplain:] this is the style used for
|
|
% |theorem|,
|
|
% |conjecture|,
|
|
% |proposition|,
|
|
% |lemma| and
|
|
% |corollary|, and
|
|
% \item[acmdefinition:] this is the style used for
|
|
% |example| and
|
|
% |definition|.
|
|
% \end{description}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% These environments are defined by default. In the unusual
|
|
% circumstance that a user does not wish to have these environments
|
|
% defined, the option |acmthm=false| in the preamble will suppress
|
|
% them.
|
|
%
|
|
%\subsection{Online-only and offline-only material}
|
|
%\label{sec:ug_screen}
|
|
%
|
|
% \DescribeEnv{printonly}%
|
|
% \DescribeEnv{screenonly}%
|
|
% Some supplementary material in ACM publications is put online but
|
|
% not in the printed version. The text inside the environment
|
|
% |screenonly| will be typeset only when the option |screen| (see
|
|
% Section~\ref{sec:invocation}) is set to |true|. Conversely, the
|
|
% text inside the environment |printonly| is typset only when this
|
|
% option is set to |false|. For example,
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% \section{Supplementary materials}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{printonly}
|
|
% Supplementary materials are available in the online version of this paper.
|
|
% \end{printonly}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{screenonly}
|
|
% (The actual supplementary materials.)
|
|
% \end{screenonly}
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
%
|
|
% We use the |comment| package for typesetting this code, so
|
|
% |\begin| and |\end| should start on a line of their own with
|
|
% no leading or trailing spaces.
|
|
%
|
|
%\subsection{Note about anonymous mode}
|
|
%\label{sec:ug_anonymous}
|
|
%
|
|
% \DescribeEnv{anonsuppress}%
|
|
% When the option |anonymous| is selected, \TeX\ suppresses author
|
|
% information (including the number of authors) for a blind review.
|
|
% However, sometimes the information identifying the authors may be
|
|
% present in the body of the paper. For example,
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% \begin{anonsuppress}
|
|
% This is the continuation of the previous work by the author
|
|
% \cite{prev1, prev2}.
|
|
% \end{anonsuppress}
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
%
|
|
% As for the |printonly| and |screenonly| environments,
|
|
% |\begin{anonsuppress}| and |\end{anonsuppress}| should start on a
|
|
% line of their own with no leading or trailing spaces.
|
|
%
|
|
%\subsection{Acknowledgments}
|
|
%\label{sec:ug_acks}
|
|
%
|
|
% The traditional ``Acknowledgments'' section is conventionally used
|
|
% to thank persons and granting agencies for their help and support.
|
|
% However, there are several important considerations about this
|
|
% section.
|
|
%
|
|
% First, in anonymous mode this section must be omitted: it gives
|
|
% too much information to reviewers. Second, data about
|
|
% grants is extracted and stored separately by the postprocessing
|
|
% software. ACM classes provide facilities for both these tasks.
|
|
%
|
|
% \DescribeEnv{acks}%
|
|
% The environment |acks| starts an unnumbered section
|
|
% ``Acknowledgments'' unless the anonymous mode is chosen. Put all
|
|
% thanks inside this environment.
|
|
%
|
|
% As for the |printonly| and |screenonly| environments,
|
|
% |\begin{acks}| and |\end{acks}| should start on a
|
|
% line of their own with no leading or trailing spaces.
|
|
%
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\grantsponsor}%
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\grantnum}%
|
|
% All financial support \emph{must} be listed using the commands
|
|
% \cs{grantsponsor} and \cs{grantnum}. These commands tell the
|
|
% postprocessing software about the granting organization and
|
|
% grant. The format of these commands is the following:
|
|
% \begin{quote}
|
|
% \cs{grantsponsor}\marg{sponsorID}\marg{name}\marg{url}\\
|
|
% \cs{grantnum}\oarg{url}\marg{sponsorID}\marg{number}.
|
|
% \end{quote}
|
|
% Here \marg{sponsorID} is the unique ID used to match grants to
|
|
% sponsors, \marg{name} is the name of the sponsor, \marg{url} is its
|
|
% URL, and \marg{number} is the grant number. The \marg{sponsorID} of
|
|
% the \cs{grantnum} command must correspond to the \marg{sponsorID} of a
|
|
% \cs{grantsponsor} command. Some awards have their own web pages,
|
|
% which you can include using the optional argument of the \cs{grantnum}
|
|
% command.
|
|
%
|
|
% At present \marg{sponsorID} is chosen by the authors and can be an
|
|
% arbitrary key in the same way the label of a \cs{cite} is arbitrarily
|
|
% chosen. There might be a change to this policy if the ACM decides to
|
|
% create a global database of sponsoring organizations.
|
|
%
|
|
% Example:
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% \begin{acks}
|
|
% The authors would like to thank Dr. Yuhua Li for providing the
|
|
% matlab code of the \textit{BEPS} method.
|
|
%
|
|
% The authors would also like to thank the anonymous referees for
|
|
% their valuable comments and helpful suggestions. This work is
|
|
% supported by the \grantsponsor{GS501100001809}{National Natural
|
|
% Science Foundation of
|
|
% China}{https://doi.org/10.13039/501100001809} under Grant
|
|
% No.:~\grantnum{GS501100001809}{61273304}
|
|
% and~\grantnum[http://www.nnsf.cn/youngscientists]{GS501100001809}{Young
|
|
% Scientists' Support Program}.
|
|
% \end{acks}
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
%\subsection{Bibliography}
|
|
%\label{sec:ug_bibliography}
|
|
%
|
|
% The ACM uses the |natbib| package for formatting references and
|
|
% the Bib\TeX\ style file \path{ACM-Reference-Format.bst} for Bib\TeX\
|
|
% processing. You can disable loading of |natbib| using the
|
|
% option |natbib=false| in \cs{documentclass}. However, it is not
|
|
% recommended, as well as the use of Bib\TeX\ styles other than
|
|
% \path{ACM-Reference-Format.bst}, and may delay the processing of the
|
|
% manuscript.
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\citestyle}%
|
|
% If you use |natbib|, you can select one of two predefined citation
|
|
% styles using the command \cs{citestyle}: the author-year format
|
|
% |acmauthoryear| or the numeric format |acmnumeric|. For example,
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% \citestyle{acmauthoryear}
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
% Note that numeric citations are the default mode for most formats.
|
|
%
|
|
% \DescribeMacro{\setcitestyle}%
|
|
% You can further customize |natbib| using
|
|
% the \cs{setcitestyle} command, for example,
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% \setcitestyle{numbers,sort&compress}
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
%
|
|
% One of the more common versions is
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% \setcitestyle{nosort}
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
% It is useful if you do not like the way |natbib| sorts citation
|
|
% lists.
|
|
%
|
|
% If you use |natbib|, then commands like \cs{citep} and
|
|
% \cs{citeauthor} are automatically supported. The command
|
|
% \cs{shortcite} is the same as \cs{cite} in numerical mode and cites
|
|
% the year in author-date mode.
|
|
%
|
|
% Note that before version~1.48 the command \cs{citeyear} put the year
|
|
% in parentheses. In version~1.48 and later it produces just the
|
|
% year; the command \cs{citeyearpar} can be used to emulate its old
|
|
% behavior.
|
|
%
|
|
% There are several customized \BibTeX\ entry types and fields in the ACM
|
|
% style file \path{ACM-Reference-Format.bst} that you may want to be
|
|
% aware of.
|
|
%
|
|
% The style supports the fields \path{doi} and \path{url}, for example,
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% doi = "10.1145/1188913.1188915",
|
|
% url = "http://ccrma.stanford.edu/~jos/bayes/bayes.pdf",
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
%
|
|
% The style supports the arXiv-recommended fields \path{eprint} and
|
|
% (optionally) \path{primaryclass}, for example,
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% eprint = "960935712",
|
|
% primaryclass = "cs",
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
% See the examples at \url{http://arxiv.org/hypertex/bibstyles/}.
|
|
%
|
|
% There are the special entry types \path{online} and
|
|
% \path{game} for Web pages and games, for example,
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% @online{Thornburg01,
|
|
% author = "Harry Thornburg",
|
|
% year = "2001",
|
|
% title = "Introduction to Bayesian Statistics",
|
|
% url = "http://ccrma.stanford.edu/~jos/bayes/bayes.html",
|
|
% month = mar,
|
|
% lastaccessed = "March 2, 2005",
|
|
% }
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
% For these entry types you can use the \path{lastaccessed} field to add
|
|
% the access date for the URL.
|
|
%
|
|
% There are two ways to enter video or audio sources in the
|
|
% bibliograpy corresponding to two different possibilies. For
|
|
% standalone sources available online, you can use an \path{online}
|
|
% entry and set its \path{howpublished} field. For example,
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% @online{Obama08,
|
|
% author = "Barack Obama",
|
|
% year = "2008",
|
|
% title = "A more perfect union",
|
|
% howpublished = "Video",
|
|
% day = "5",
|
|
% url = "http://video.google.com/videoplay?docid=6528042696351994555",
|
|
% month = mar,
|
|
% lastaccessed = "March 21, 2008",
|
|
% }
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
%
|
|
% For sources available as attachments to conference proceedings
|
|
% and similar documents, you can use the usual \path{inproceedings}
|
|
% entry type and set its \path{howpublished} field:
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% @Inproceedings{Novak03,
|
|
% author = "Dave Novak",
|
|
% title = "Solder man",
|
|
% booktitle = "ACM SIGGRAPH 2003 Video Review on Animation theater Program",
|
|
% year = "2003",
|
|
% publisher = "ACM Press",
|
|
% address = "New York, NY",
|
|
% pages = "4",
|
|
% month = "March 21, 2008",
|
|
% doi = "10.9999/woot07-S422",
|
|
% howpublished = "Video",
|
|
% }
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
%
|
|
% Sometimes you need to cite a complete issue of a journal. The
|
|
% \path{periodical} entry type is intended for this:
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% @periodical{JCohen96,
|
|
% key = "Cohen",
|
|
% editor = "Jacques Cohen",
|
|
% title = "Special issue: Digital Libraries",
|
|
% journal = "Communications of the {ACM}",
|
|
% volume = "39",
|
|
% number = "11",
|
|
% month = nov,
|
|
% year = "1996",
|
|
% }
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
%
|
|
% If you do not know the year of publication, the style will add
|
|
% ``[n. d.]'' (for ``no date'') to the entry.
|
|
%
|
|
% If you do not know the author (this is often the case for online
|
|
% entries), use the |key| field to add a key for sorting and citations,
|
|
% for example,
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% @online{TUGInstmem,
|
|
% key = {TUG},
|
|
% year = 2017,
|
|
% title = "Institutional members of the {\TeX} Users Group",
|
|
% url = "http://wwtug.org/instmem.html",
|
|
% lastaccessed = "May 27, 2017",
|
|
% }
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
%\subsection{Colors}
|
|
%\label{sec:ug_colors}
|
|
%
|
|
% While printed ACM publications are usually black and white, |screen|
|
|
% mode allows the use of colors. The ACM classes pre-define several
|
|
% colors according to~\cite{ACMIdentityStandards}: |ACMBlue|,
|
|
% |ACMYellow|, |ACMOrange|, |ACMRed|, |ACMLightBlue|, |ACMGreen|,
|
|
% |ACMPurple| and |ACMDarkBlue|. You can use them in color
|
|
% assignments.
|
|
%
|
|
% The ACM provides the following recommendation on color use.
|
|
%
|
|
% The most accessible approach would be to ensure that your article is
|
|
% still readable when printed in greyscale. The most notable reasons
|
|
% for this are:
|
|
% \begin{enumerate}
|
|
% \item The most common type of inherited Color Vision Deficiency
|
|
% (CVD) is red-green (in which similar-brightness colors that differ
|
|
% only in their amounts of red or green are often confused), and it
|
|
% affects up to 8\% of males and 0.5\% of females of Northern European
|
|
% descent.
|
|
% \item The most common type of acquired Color Vision Deficiency (CVD)
|
|
% is blue-yellow (including mild cases for many older adults).
|
|
% \item Most printing is in black and white.
|
|
% \item Situational impairments (e.g., bright sunlight shining on a
|
|
% mobile screen) tend to reduce the entire color gamut, reducing color
|
|
% discriminability.
|
|
% \end{enumerate}
|
|
%
|
|
% \textbf{Note:} It is \emph{not} safe to encode information using
|
|
% only variations in color (i.e., only differences in hue and/or
|
|
% saturation) as there is bound to be someone affected!
|
|
%
|
|
% To ensure that you are using the most accessible colors, the ACM
|
|
% recommends that you choose sets of colors to help ensure suitable
|
|
% variations in when printed in greyscale by using either of the following tools:
|
|
% \begin{enumerate}
|
|
% \item ColourBrewer: \url{http://colorbrewer2.org/}
|
|
% \item ACE: The Accessible Colour Evaluator:
|
|
% \url{http://daprlab.com/ace/} for designing WCAG 2.0 compliant
|
|
% palettes.
|
|
% \end{enumerate}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
%\subsection{Other notable packages and typographic remarks}
|
|
%\label{sec:ug_other}
|
|
%
|
|
% Several other packages are recommended for specialized tasks.
|
|
%
|
|
% The package |subcaption|~\cite{Sommerfeldt13:Subcaption} is
|
|
% recommended for complex figures with several subplots or subfigures
|
|
% that require separate subcaptioning. The packages
|
|
% |nomencl|~\cite{Nomencl} and
|
|
% |glossaries|~\cite{Talbot16:Glossaries} can be used for the
|
|
% automatic creation of the lists of symbols and concepts used.
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% By default |acmart| prevents all widows and orphans (i.e., lonely
|
|
% lines at the beginning or end of the page) and hyphenation at
|
|
% the end of the page. This is done by the rather strict settings
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% \widowpenalty=10000
|
|
% \clubpenalty=10000
|
|
% \brokenpenalty=10000
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
% However, this may lead to frustrating results when the authors must
|
|
% obey a page limit. Setting these penalties to smaller values may
|
|
% help if you absolutely need to.
|
|
%
|
|
% Another problem might be the too strict line breaking rules. Again,
|
|
% a strategically placed \cs{sloppy} command or putting the
|
|
% problematic paragraph inside \texttt{sloppypar} environment might
|
|
% help---but beware, the results might be, well, sloppy.
|
|
%
|
|
% Note that the uppercasing in section titles is done using
|
|
% the |textcase| package~\cite{Carlisle04:Textcase}, so the command
|
|
% \cs{NoCaseChange} inside the title may help to prevent extraneous
|
|
% uppercasing.
|
|
%
|
|
%\subsection{A note for wizards: \texttt{acmart-preload-hook.tex}}
|
|
%\label{sec:ug_preload}
|
|
%
|
|
% Sometimes you need to change the behavior of |acmart|. The
|
|
% usual way to do this is to redefine commands in the preamble.
|
|
% However, these definitions are executed \emph{after} |acmart| is
|
|
% loaded and certain decisions are made. This presents a number of
|
|
% problems.
|
|
%
|
|
% For example, one may want to use the |titletoc| package with |acmart|.
|
|
% This package should be loaded before |hyperref|. However, since
|
|
% |acmart| loads |hyperref| itself, the line |\usepackage{titletoc}|
|
|
% in the preamble will lead to grief (see
|
|
% \url{http://tex.stackexchange.com/questions/357265/using-titletoc-with-acm-acmart-style}).
|
|
%
|
|
% Another example is passing options to a package. Suppose you want to
|
|
% use the |dvipsnames| option of the |xcolor| package. Normally you cannot do
|
|
% this because |acmart| loads this package itself without options.
|
|
%
|
|
% The file |acmart-preload-hook.tex| can be used to solve these
|
|
% problems. If this file exists, it will be processed before any other
|
|
% package. You can use this file to load packages or pass options to
|
|
% them. For example, if you put in this file
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% \let\LoadClassOrig\LoadClass
|
|
% \renewcommand\LoadClass[2][]{\LoadClassOrig[#1]{#2}%
|
|
% \usepackage{titletoc}}
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
% then |titletoc| will be loaded before |hyperref|. If you put in
|
|
% this file
|
|
% \begin{verbatim}
|
|
% \PassOptionsToPackage{dvipsnames}{xcolor}
|
|
% \end{verbatim}
|
|
% you will pass |dvipsnames| to |xcolor|.
|
|
%
|
|
% \textbf{Important note.} This hook makes it too easy to create a
|
|
% manuscript that is not acceptable by the ACM. It is even easier to
|
|
% create a file that cannot be compiled. So please do not use it
|
|
% \emph{unless you know what you are doing.} And if you use it,
|
|
% \emph{do not ask for support.} If you decide to use this hook, you
|
|
% are on your own.
|
|
%
|
|
% \StopEventually{
|
|
% \clearpage
|
|
% \bibliography{acmart}
|
|
% \bibliographystyle{unsrt}}
|
|
%
|
|
% \clearpage
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
%\section{Implementation}
|
|
%\label{sec:impl}
|
|
%
|
|
%\subsection{Identification}
|
|
%\label{sec:ident}
|
|
%
|
|
% We start with a declaration of who we are. Most |.dtx| files put
|
|
% driver code in a separate~|.drv| driver file. We roll this code into the
|
|
% main file and use the pseudo-guard |<gobble>| for it.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
%<class>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
|
|
%<*gobble>
|
|
\ProvidesFile{acmart.dtx}
|
|
%</gobble>
|
|
%<class>\ProvidesClass{acmart}
|
|
[2018/02/07 v1.50 Typesetting articles for the Association for
|
|
Computing Machinery]
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \changes{v1.00}{2016/04/14}{First released version}
|
|
% \changes{v1.01}{2016/04/18}{Defined ACM colors}
|
|
% \changes{v1.01}{2016/04/18}{Changed hyperref colors in screen mode
|
|
% (closes \url{https://github.com/borisveytsman/acmart/issues/1})}
|
|
% \changes{v1.01}{2016/04/18}{Set headheight to 1pc for all formats
|
|
% (closes \url{https://github.com/borisveytsman/acmart/issues/5})}
|
|
% \changes{v1.02}{2016/04/21}{Documentation changes
|
|
% (closes \url{https://github.com/borisveytsman/acmart/issues/13})}
|
|
% \changes{v1.02}{2016/04/21}{Added TOPS and TSC
|
|
% (closes \url{https://github.com/borisveytsman/acmart/issues/12})}
|
|
% \changes{v1.03}{2016/04/22}{Added authorversion option
|
|
% (closes \url{https://github.com/borisveytsman/acmart/issues/9})}
|
|
% \changes{v1.03}{2016/04/22}{Added anonsuppress environment}
|
|
% \changes{v1.04}{2016/04/26}{Updated bibliography for siggraph}
|
|
% \changes{v1.05}{2016/04/27}{Patched \cs{setcitestyle} command;
|
|
% closes \url{https://github.com/borisveytsman/acmart/issues/19}}
|
|
% \changes{v1.05}{2016/04/27}{Added processing doi numbers for
|
|
% acmsiggraph and doi numbers for sigproc.bib}
|
|
% \changes{v1.08}{2016/05/13}{SIGPLAN reformatting by Matthew Fluet}
|
|
% \changes{v1.08}{2016/05/13}{Typos corrected (Tobias Pape)}
|
|
% \changes{v1.09}{2016/05/18}{Revert SIGPLAN caption rules}
|
|
% \changes{v1.11}{2016/05/27}{Customization of ACM theorem styles and
|
|
% proof environment by Matthew Fluet}
|
|
% \changes{v1.12}{2016/05/30}{Documentation updates}
|
|
% \changes{v1.14}{2016/06/09}{\cs{citestyle} updates (Matthew Fluet)}
|
|
% \changes{v1.16}{2016/07/07}{Formatting header/footer (Matthew
|
|
% Fluet)}
|
|
% \changes{v1.18}{2016/07/10}{Natbib is now the default for all
|
|
% formats}
|
|
% \changes{v1.19}{2016/07/28}{Include 'Abstract', 'Acknowledgements',
|
|
% and 'References' in PDF bookmarks (Matthew Fluet)}
|
|
% \changes{v1.20}{2016/08/06}{Bug fixes for bst}
|
|
% \changes{v1.22}{2016/09/25}{More bibliography changes for Aptara}
|
|
% \changes{v1.23}{2016/11/04}{Add PACMPL journal option}
|
|
% \changes{v1.26}{2016/12/24}{Corrected \cs{shortcite} bug}
|
|
% \changes{v1.26}{2016/12/24}{Documentation typos fixed (thanks to
|
|
% Stephen Spencer)}
|
|
% \changes{v1.30}{2017/02/04}{Bibtex style now recognizes https:// in
|
|
% doi}
|
|
% \changes{v1.31}{2017/03/04}{Documentation changes}
|
|
% \changes{v1.32}{2017/03/07}{Format siggraph is now obsolete}
|
|
% \changes{v1.32}{2017/03/07}{Added POMACS journal option}
|
|
% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/12}{BibTeX crossref bug corrected}
|
|
% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/18}{BibTeX comma before articleno bug
|
|
% corrected}
|
|
% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/18}{BibTeX numpages bug corrected}
|
|
% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/28}{Added acmart-preload-hook}
|
|
% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/33}{Documentation updates}
|
|
% \changes{v1.35}{2017/04/23}{BibTeX bug fixed: et al.}
|
|
% \changes{v1.36}{2017/05/12}{Added the possibility to adjust number of
|
|
% author boxes per row in conference formats}
|
|
% \changes{v1.37}{2017/05/13}{Set \cs{normalparindent}; Reduce list
|
|
% indentation (Matthew Fluet)}%
|
|
% \changes{v1.38}{2017/05/13}{Increase default font size for SIGPLAN}
|
|
% \changes{v1.40}{2017/05/27}{Bibliography changes}
|
|
% \changes{v1.40}{2017/06/15}{Added package cleveref}
|
|
% \changes{v1.40}{2017/06/16}{Added new copyright version:
|
|
% licensedcagov}
|
|
% \changes{v1.41}{2017/06/25}{Added new badges}
|
|
% \changes{v1.42}{2017/07/02}{Deleted ACM badges}
|
|
% \changes{v1.44}{2017/07/30}{Added package refcount}
|
|
% \changes{v1.44}{2017/07/30}{Deleted package cleveref}
|
|
% \changes{v1.44}{2017/07/30}{Put theorem defs in a separate style}
|
|
% \changes{v1.46}{2017/08/17}{Bst file bug fixes: label width is
|
|
% calculated correctly}
|
|
% \changes{v1.46}{2017/08/25}{Added etoolbox}
|
|
% \changes{v1.46}{2017/08/29}{Restore theorem defs to class file}
|
|
% \changes{v1.47}{2017/08/31}{New journal: THRI}
|
|
% \changes{v1.48}{2017/09/09}{Typos fixed (Jamie Davis)}
|
|
% \changes{v1.48}{2017/09/16}{Code prettying (Michael D.~Adams)}
|
|
% \changes{v1.48}{2017/09/23}{Misc entries in the bibliography no
|
|
% longer produce a separate date}
|
|
% \changes{v1.48}{2017/10/01}{Initial support for Biblatex (Daniel Thomas)}
|
|
% \changes{1.48}{2017/10/14}{Bib code cleanup (Zack Weinberg)}
|
|
% \changes{1.48}{2017/12/03}{Documentation update (siggraph)}
|
|
% \changes{1.49}{2018/01/24}{New journal: DTRAP}
|
|
%
|
|
% And the driver code:
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
%<*gobble>
|
|
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
|
|
\usepackage{array,booktabs,amsmath,graphicx,fancyvrb,tabularx}
|
|
\usepackage[tt=false, type1=true]{libertine}
|
|
\usepackage[varqu]{zi4}
|
|
\usepackage[libertine]{newtxmath}
|
|
\usepackage[tableposition=top]{caption}
|
|
\usepackage{hypdoc}
|
|
\PageIndex
|
|
\CodelineIndex
|
|
\RecordChanges
|
|
\EnableCrossrefs
|
|
\begin{document}
|
|
\DocInput{acmart.dtx}
|
|
\end{document}
|
|
%</gobble>
|
|
%<*class>
|
|
\def\@classname{acmart}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
%\subsection{Preload hook}
|
|
%\label{sec:preload}
|
|
%
|
|
% We preload |acmart-preload-hook|:
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\InputIfFileExists{acmart-preload-hook.tex}{%
|
|
\ClassWarning{\@classname}{%
|
|
I am loading acmart-preload-hook.tex. You are fully responsible
|
|
for any problems from now on.}}{}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \subsection{Options}
|
|
% \label{sec:options}
|
|
%
|
|
% We need |xkeyval| since some of our options may have values:
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\RequirePackage{xkeyval}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% We use |xstring| to check whether user input is integer
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\RequirePackage{xstring}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{format}
|
|
% The possible formats
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\define@choicekey*+{acmart.cls}{format}[\ACM@format\ACM@format@nr]{%
|
|
manuscript, acmsmall, acmlarge, acmtog, sigconf, siggraph,
|
|
sigplan, sigchi, sigchi-a}[manuscript]{}{%
|
|
\ClassError{\@classname}{The option format must be manuscript,
|
|
acmsmall, acmlarge, acmtog, sigconf, siggraph,
|
|
sigplan, sigchi or sigchi-a}}
|
|
\def\@DeclareACMFormat#1{\DeclareOptionX{#1}{\setkeys{acmart.cls}{format=#1}}}
|
|
\@DeclareACMFormat{manuscript}
|
|
\@DeclareACMFormat{acmsmall}
|
|
\@DeclareACMFormat{acmlarge}
|
|
\@DeclareACMFormat{acmtog}
|
|
\@DeclareACMFormat{sigconf}
|
|
\@DeclareACMFormat{siggraph}
|
|
\@DeclareACMFormat{sigplan}
|
|
\@DeclareACMFormat{sigchi}
|
|
\@DeclareACMFormat{sigchi-a}
|
|
\ExecuteOptionsX{format}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\if@ACM@screen}
|
|
% Whether we use screen mode
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\define@boolkey+{acmart.cls}[@ACM@]{screen}[true]{%
|
|
\if@ACM@screen
|
|
\PackageInfo{\@classname}{Using screen mode}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\PackageInfo{\@classname}{Not using screen mode}%
|
|
\fi}{\PackageError{\@classname}{The option screen can be either true or
|
|
false}}
|
|
\ExecuteOptionsX{screen=false}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\if@ACM@acmthm}
|
|
% \changes{v1.44}{2017/07/30}{Added macro}
|
|
% \changes{v1.46}{2017/08/29}{Modified description}
|
|
% Whether we define theorem-like environments.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\define@boolkey+{acmart.cls}[@ACM@]{acmthm}[true]{%
|
|
\if@ACM@acmthm
|
|
\PackageInfo{\@classname}{Requiring acmthm}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\PackageInfo{\@classname}{Suppressing acmthm}%
|
|
\fi}{\PackageError{\@classname}{The option acmthm can be either true or
|
|
false}}
|
|
\ExecuteOptionsX{acmthm=true}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\if@ACM@review}
|
|
% \changes{v1.48}{2017/09/09}{Review mode now switches on folios}
|
|
% Whether we use review mode
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\define@boolkey+{acmart.cls}[@ACM@]{review}[true]{%
|
|
\if@ACM@review
|
|
\PackageInfo{\@classname}{Using review mode}%
|
|
\AtBeginDocument{\@ACM@printfoliostrue}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\PackageInfo{\@classname}{Not using review mode}%
|
|
\fi}{\PackageError{\@classname}{The option review can be either true or
|
|
false}}
|
|
\ExecuteOptionsX{review=false}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\if@ACM@authorversion}
|
|
% \changes{v1.03}{2016/04/22}{Added macro}
|
|
% Whether we use author's-version mode
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\define@boolkey+{acmart.cls}[@ACM@]{authorversion}[true]{%
|
|
\if@ACM@authorversion
|
|
\PackageInfo{\@classname}{Using authorversion mode}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\PackageInfo{\@classname}{Not using authorversion mode}%
|
|
\fi}{\PackageError{\@classname}{The option authorversion can be either true or
|
|
false}}
|
|
\ExecuteOptionsX{authorversion=false}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\if@ACM@natbib@override}
|
|
% \changes{v1.12}{2016/05/30}{Added macro}
|
|
% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/28}{Deleted macro}
|
|
% This macro is no longer used.
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\if@ACM@natbib}
|
|
% Whether we use |natbib| mode
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\define@boolkey+{acmart.cls}[@ACM@]{natbib}[true]{%
|
|
\if@ACM@natbib
|
|
\PackageInfo{\@classname}{Explicitly selecting natbib mode}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\PackageInfo{\@classname}{Explicitly deselecting natbib mode}%
|
|
\fi}{\PackageError{\@classname}{The option natbib can be either true or
|
|
false}}
|
|
\ExecuteOptionsX{natbib=true}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\if@ACM@anonymous}
|
|
% Whether we use anonymous mode
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\define@boolkey+{acmart.cls}[@ACM@]{anonymous}[true]{%
|
|
\if@ACM@anonymous
|
|
\PackageInfo{\@classname}{Using anonymous mode}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\PackageInfo{\@classname}{Not using anonymous mode}%
|
|
\fi}{\PackageError{\@classname}{The option anonymous can be either true or
|
|
false}}
|
|
\ExecuteOptionsX{anonymous=false}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\if@ACM@timestamp}
|
|
% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/10}{Added macro (Michael D.~Adams)}
|
|
% Whether we use timestamp mode
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\define@boolkey+{acmart.cls}[@ACM@]{timestamp}[true]{%
|
|
\if@ACM@timestamp
|
|
\PackageInfo{\@classname}{Using timestamp mode}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\PackageInfo{\@classname}{Not using timestamp mode}%
|
|
\fi}{\PackageError{\@classname}{The option timestamp can be either true or
|
|
false}}
|
|
\ExecuteOptionsX{timestamp=false}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\if@ACM@authordraft}
|
|
% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/28}{Added macro}
|
|
% \changes{v1.36}{2017/05/13}{Corrected typo, thanks to bargteil}
|
|
% Whether we use author-draft mode
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\define@boolkey+{acmart.cls}[@ACM@]{authordraft}[true]{%
|
|
\if@ACM@authordraft
|
|
\PackageInfo{\@classname}{Using authordraft mode}%
|
|
\@ACM@timestamptrue
|
|
\@ACM@reviewtrue
|
|
\else
|
|
\PackageInfo{\@classname}{Not using authordraft mode}%
|
|
\fi}{\PackageError{\@classname}{The option authordraft can be either true or
|
|
false}}
|
|
\ExecuteOptionsX{authordraft=false}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\ACM@fontsize}
|
|
% The font size to pass to the base class
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\ACM@fontsize{}
|
|
\DeclareOptionX{9pt}{\edef\ACM@fontsize{\CurrentOption}}
|
|
\DeclareOptionX{10pt}{\edef\ACM@fontsize{\CurrentOption}}
|
|
\DeclareOptionX{11pt}{\edef\ACM@fontsize{\CurrentOption}}
|
|
\DeclareOptionX{12pt}{\edef\ACM@fontsize{\CurrentOption}}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \changes{v1.01}{2016/04/18}{Explicitly put draft option
|
|
% (closes \url{https://github.com/borisveytsman/acmart/issues/4})}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\DeclareOptionX{draft}{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{amsart}}
|
|
\DeclareOptionX{*}{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{amsart}}
|
|
\ProcessOptionsX
|
|
\ClassInfo{\@classname}{Using format \ACM@format, number \ACM@format@nr}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
%\subsection{Setting switches}
|
|
%\label{sec:switches}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\if@ACM@manuscript}
|
|
% Whether we use manuscript mode
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\newif\if@ACM@manuscript
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\if@ACM@journal}
|
|
% There are two kinds of publications: journals and books
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\newif\if@ACM@journal
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\if@ACM@sigchiamode}
|
|
% The formatting of SIGCHI extended abstracts is quite unusual. We have a
|
|
% special switch for them.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\newif\if@ACM@sigchiamode
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% Setting up switches
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\ifnum\ACM@format@nr=5\relax % siggraph
|
|
\ClassWarning{\@classname}{The format siggraph is now obsolete.
|
|
I am switching to sigconf.}
|
|
\setkeys{acmart.cls}{format=sigconf}
|
|
\fi
|
|
\ifnum\ACM@format@nr=0\relax
|
|
\@ACM@manuscripttrue
|
|
\else
|
|
\@ACM@manuscriptfalse
|
|
\fi
|
|
\@ACM@sigchiamodefalse
|
|
\ifcase\ACM@format@nr
|
|
\relax % manuscript
|
|
\@ACM@journaltrue
|
|
\or % acmsmall
|
|
\@ACM@journaltrue
|
|
\or % acmlarge
|
|
\@ACM@journaltrue
|
|
\or % acmtog
|
|
\@ACM@journaltrue
|
|
\or % sigconf
|
|
\@ACM@journalfalse
|
|
\or % siggraph
|
|
\@ACM@journalfalse
|
|
\or % sigplan
|
|
\@ACM@journalfalse
|
|
\or % sigchi
|
|
\@ACM@journalfalse
|
|
\or % sigchi-a
|
|
\@ACM@journalfalse
|
|
\@ACM@sigchiamodetrue
|
|
\fi
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
%\subsection{Loading the base class and package}
|
|
%\label{sec:loading}
|
|
%
|
|
% \changes{v1.13}{2016/06/06}{Increased font size for ACM Large}
|
|
% \changes{v1.38}{2017/05/13}{Increase default font size for SIGPLAN}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% At this point we either have \cs{ACM@fontsize} or use defaults
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\ifx\ACM@fontsize\@empty
|
|
\ifcase\ACM@format@nr
|
|
\relax % manuscript
|
|
\def\ACM@fontsize{9pt}%
|
|
\or % acmsmall
|
|
\def\ACM@fontsize{10pt}%
|
|
\or % acmlarge
|
|
\def\ACM@fontsize{10pt}%
|
|
\or % acmtog
|
|
\def\ACM@fontsize{9pt}%
|
|
\or % sigconf
|
|
\def\ACM@fontsize{9pt}%
|
|
\or % siggraph
|
|
\def\ACM@fontsize{9pt}%
|
|
\or % sigplan
|
|
\def\ACM@fontsize{10pt}%
|
|
\or % sigchi
|
|
\def\ACM@fontsize{10pt}%
|
|
\or % sigchi-a
|
|
\def\ACM@fontsize{10pt}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\fi
|
|
\ClassInfo{\@classname}{Using fontsize \ACM@fontsize}
|
|
\LoadClass[\ACM@fontsize, reqno]{amsart}
|
|
\RequirePackage{microtype}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% We need |etoolbox| for delayed code
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\RequirePackage{etoolbox}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% We need |totpages| to calculate the number of pages and
|
|
% |refcount| to use that number
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\RequirePackage{refcount}
|
|
\RequirePackage{totpages}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% The \cs{collect@body} macro in |amsmath| is defined using \cs{def}. We load
|
|
% |environ| to access the \cs{long} version of this command
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\RequirePackage{environ}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% We use |setspace| for double spacing
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\if@ACM@manuscript
|
|
\RequirePackage{setspace}
|
|
\onehalfspacing
|
|
\fi
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \changes{v1.40}{2017/06/05}{Added `textcase' package}
|
|
% We need |textcase| for better upcasing
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\RequirePackage{textcase}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
%\subsection{Citations}
|
|
% \changes{v1.19}{2016/07/28}{Include 'References' in PDF bookmarks
|
|
% (Matthew Fluet)}
|
|
% \changes{v1.14}{2016/06/09}{Patched \cs{citestyle}}
|
|
% We patch \cs{setcitestyle} to allow, for example,
|
|
% \cs{setcitestyle}|{sort}| and \cs{setcitestyle}|{nosort}|. We patch
|
|
% \cs{citestyle} to warn about undefined citation styles.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\if@ACM@natbib
|
|
\RequirePackage{natbib}
|
|
\renewcommand{\bibsection}{%
|
|
\section*{\refname}%
|
|
\phantomsection\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\refname}%
|
|
}
|
|
\renewcommand{\bibfont}{\bibliofont}
|
|
\renewcommand\setcitestyle[1]{
|
|
\@for\@tempa:=#1\do
|
|
{\def\@tempb{round}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
|
|
\renewcommand\NAT@open{(}\renewcommand\NAT@close{)}\fi
|
|
\def\@tempb{square}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
|
|
\renewcommand\NAT@open{[}\renewcommand\NAT@close{]}\fi
|
|
\def\@tempb{angle}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
|
|
\renewcommand\NAT@open{$<$}\renewcommand\NAT@close{$>$}\fi
|
|
\def\@tempb{curly}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
|
|
\renewcommand\NAT@open{\{}\renewcommand\NAT@close{\}}\fi
|
|
\def\@tempb{semicolon}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
|
|
\renewcommand\NAT@sep{;}\fi
|
|
\def\@tempb{colon}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
|
|
\renewcommand\NAT@sep{;}\fi
|
|
\def\@tempb{comma}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
|
|
\renewcommand\NAT@sep{,}\fi
|
|
\def\@tempb{authoryear}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
|
|
\NAT@numbersfalse\fi
|
|
\def\@tempb{numbers}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
|
|
\NAT@numberstrue\NAT@superfalse\fi
|
|
\def\@tempb{super}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
|
|
\NAT@numberstrue\NAT@supertrue\fi
|
|
\def\@tempb{nobibstyle}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
|
|
\let\bibstyle=\@gobble\fi
|
|
\def\@tempb{bibstyle}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
|
|
\let\bibstyle=\@citestyle\fi
|
|
\def\@tempb{sort}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
|
|
\def\NAT@sort{\@ne}\fi
|
|
\def\@tempb{nosort}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
|
|
\def\NAT@sort{\z@}\fi
|
|
\def\@tempb{compress}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
|
|
\def\NAT@cmprs{\@ne}\fi
|
|
\def\@tempb{nocompress}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
|
|
\def\NAT@cmprs{\@z}\fi
|
|
\def\@tempb{sort&compress}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
|
|
\def\NAT@sort{\@ne}\def\NAT@cmprs{\@ne}\fi
|
|
\def\@tempb{mcite}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
|
|
\let\NAT@merge\@ne\fi
|
|
\def\@tempb{merge}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
|
|
\@ifnum{\NAT@merge<\tw@}{\let\NAT@merge\tw@}{}\fi
|
|
\def\@tempb{elide}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
|
|
\@ifnum{\NAT@merge<\thr@@}{\let\NAT@merge\thr@@}{}\fi
|
|
\def\@tempb{longnamesfirst}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
|
|
\NAT@longnamestrue\fi
|
|
\def\@tempb{nonamebreak}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
|
|
\def\NAT@nmfmt#1{\mbox{\NAT@up#1}}\fi
|
|
\expandafter\NAT@find@eq\@tempa=\relax\@nil
|
|
\if\@tempc\relax\else
|
|
\expandafter\NAT@rem@eq\@tempc
|
|
\def\@tempb{open}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
|
|
\xdef\NAT@open{\@tempc}\fi
|
|
\def\@tempb{close}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
|
|
\xdef\NAT@close{\@tempc}\fi
|
|
\def\@tempb{aysep}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
|
|
\xdef\NAT@aysep{\@tempc}\fi
|
|
\def\@tempb{yysep}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
|
|
\xdef\NAT@yrsep{\@tempc}\fi
|
|
\def\@tempb{notesep}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
|
|
\xdef\NAT@cmt{\@tempc}\fi
|
|
\def\@tempb{citesep}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
|
|
\xdef\NAT@sep{\@tempc}\fi
|
|
\fi
|
|
}%
|
|
\NAT@@setcites
|
|
}
|
|
\renewcommand\citestyle[1]{%
|
|
\ifcsname bibstyle@#1\endcsname%
|
|
\csname bibstyle@#1\endcsname\let\bibstyle\@gobble%
|
|
\else%
|
|
\@latex@error{Undefined `#1' citestyle}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\bibstyle@acmauthoryear}
|
|
% \changes{v1.13}{2016/06/06}{Added macro}
|
|
% \changes{v1.14}{2016/06/09}{Moved def of \cs{bibstyle@acmauthoryear}
|
|
% before use}
|
|
% \changes{v1.35}{2017/04/13}{Square brackets for author-year style}
|
|
% The default author-year format:
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\newcommand{\bibstyle@acmauthoryear}{%
|
|
\setcitestyle{%
|
|
authoryear,%
|
|
open={[},close={]},citesep={;},%
|
|
aysep={},yysep={,},%
|
|
notesep={, }}}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\bibstyle@acmnumeric}
|
|
% \changes{v1.13}{2016/06/06}{Added macro}
|
|
% \changes{v1.14}{2016/06/09}{Moved def of \cs{bibstyle@numeric}
|
|
% before use}
|
|
% The default numeric format:
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\newcommand{\bibstyle@acmnumeric}{%
|
|
\setcitestyle{%
|
|
numbers,sort&compress,%
|
|
open={[},close={]},citesep={,},%
|
|
notesep={, }}}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \changes{v1.28}{2017/01/07}{Corrected option natbib behavior}
|
|
% The default is numeric:
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\if@ACM@natbib
|
|
\citestyle{acmnumeric}
|
|
\fi
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@startsection}
|
|
% \changes{v1.31}{2017/03/04}{Added \cs{tochangmeasure}}
|
|
% Before we call |hyperref|, we redefine \cs{startsection} commands to
|
|
% their \LaTeX\ defaults since the |amsart| ones are too AMS-specific.
|
|
% We need to do this early since we want |hyperref| to have a chance
|
|
% to redefine them again:
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@startsection#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
|
|
\if@noskipsec \leavevmode \fi
|
|
\par
|
|
\@tempskipa #4\relax
|
|
\@afterindenttrue
|
|
\ifdim \@tempskipa <\z@
|
|
\@tempskipa -\@tempskipa \@afterindentfalse
|
|
\fi
|
|
\if@nobreak
|
|
\everypar{}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\addpenalty\@secpenalty\addvspace\@tempskipa
|
|
\fi
|
|
\@ifstar
|
|
{\@ssect{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}%
|
|
{\@dblarg{\@sect{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}}
|
|
\def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{%
|
|
\edef\@toclevel{\ifnum#2=\@m 0\else\number#2\fi}%
|
|
\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth
|
|
\let\@svsec\@empty
|
|
\else
|
|
\refstepcounter{#1}%
|
|
\protected@edef\@svsec{\@seccntformat{#1}\relax}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\@tempskipa #5\relax
|
|
\ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@
|
|
\begingroup
|
|
#6{%
|
|
\@hangfrom{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}%
|
|
\interlinepenalty \@M #8\@@par}%
|
|
\endgroup
|
|
\csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}%
|
|
\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else
|
|
\@tochangmeasure{\csname the#1\endcsname}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{%
|
|
\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else
|
|
\protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
#7}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\def\@svsechd{%
|
|
#6{\hskip #3\relax
|
|
\@svsec #8}%
|
|
\csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}%
|
|
\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else
|
|
\@tochangmeasure{\csname the#1\endcsname\space}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{%
|
|
\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else
|
|
\protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
#7}}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\@xsect{#5}}
|
|
\def\@xsect#1{%
|
|
\@tempskipa #1\relax
|
|
\ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@
|
|
\par \nobreak
|
|
\vskip \@tempskipa
|
|
\@afterheading
|
|
\else
|
|
\@nobreakfalse
|
|
\global\@noskipsectrue
|
|
\everypar{%
|
|
\if@noskipsec
|
|
\global\@noskipsecfalse
|
|
{\setbox\z@\lastbox}%
|
|
\clubpenalty\@M
|
|
\begingroup \@svsechd \endgroup
|
|
\unskip
|
|
\@tempskipa #1\relax
|
|
\hskip -\@tempskipa
|
|
\else
|
|
\clubpenalty \@clubpenalty
|
|
\everypar{}%
|
|
\fi}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\ignorespaces}
|
|
\def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1\endcsname\quad}
|
|
\def\@ssect#1#2#3#4#5{%
|
|
\@tempskipa #3\relax
|
|
\ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@
|
|
\begingroup
|
|
#4{%
|
|
\@hangfrom{\hskip #1}%
|
|
\interlinepenalty \@M #5\@@par}%
|
|
\endgroup
|
|
\else
|
|
\def\@svsechd{#4{\hskip #1\relax #5}}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\@xsect{#3}}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@startsection}
|
|
% \changes{v1.31}{2017/03/04}{Rededined macro}
|
|
% \changes{v1.43}{2017/07/09}{Added \cs{makeatletter}}
|
|
% The |amsart| package redefines \cs{startsection}. Here we redefine
|
|
% it again to make the table of contents work.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@starttoc#1#2{\begingroup\makeatletter
|
|
\setTrue{#1}%
|
|
\par\removelastskip\vskip\z@skip
|
|
\@startsection{section}\@M\z@{\linespacing\@plus\linespacing}%
|
|
{.5\linespacing}{\centering\contentsnamefont}{#2}%
|
|
\@input{\jobname.#1}%
|
|
\if@filesw
|
|
\@xp\newwrite\csname tf@#1\endcsname
|
|
\immediate\@xp\openout\csname tf@#1\endcsname \jobname.#1\relax
|
|
\fi
|
|
\global\@nobreakfalse \endgroup
|
|
\addvspace{32\p@\@plus14\p@}%
|
|
}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\l@subsection}
|
|
% \changes{v1.40}{2017/05/27}{Redefined macro}
|
|
% Section spacing is more generous than for |amsart|
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\l@section{\@tocline{1}{0pt}{1pc}{2pc}{}}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\l@subsection}
|
|
% \changes{v1.31}{2017/03/04}{Redefined macro}
|
|
% The spacing in |amsart| is too large
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\l@subsection{\@tocline{2}{0pt}{1pc}{3pc}{}}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\l@subsubsection}
|
|
% \changes{v1.31}{2017/03/04}{Redefined macro}
|
|
% The spacing in |amsart| is too large
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\l@subsubsection{\@tocline{2}{0pt}{1pc}{5pc}{}}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% And |hyperref|
|
|
% \changes{v1.28}{2017/01/07}{Got rid of warnings in pdf keywords}
|
|
% \changes{v1.46}{2017/08/25}{Delayed hypersetup since journal options
|
|
% may change screen mode}
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\let\@footnotemark@nolink\@footnotemark
|
|
\let\@footnotetext@nolink\@footnotetext
|
|
\RequirePackage[bookmarksnumbered,unicode]{hyperref}
|
|
\pdfstringdefDisableCommands{%
|
|
\def\unskip{}%
|
|
\def\textbullet{- }%
|
|
\def\textrightarrow{ -> }%
|
|
\def\footnotemark{}%
|
|
}
|
|
\urlstyle{rm}
|
|
\ifcase\ACM@format@nr
|
|
\relax % manuscript
|
|
\or % acmsmall
|
|
\or % acmlarge
|
|
\or % acmtog
|
|
\or % sigconf
|
|
\or % siggraph
|
|
\or % sigplan
|
|
\urlstyle{sf}
|
|
\or % sigchi
|
|
\or % sigchi-a
|
|
\urlstyle{sf}
|
|
\fi
|
|
\AtEndPreamble{%
|
|
\if@ACM@screen
|
|
\hypersetup{colorlinks,
|
|
linkcolor=ACMRed,
|
|
citecolor=ACMPurple,
|
|
urlcolor=ACMDarkBlue,
|
|
filecolor=ACMDarkBlue}
|
|
\else
|
|
\hypersetup{hidelinks}
|
|
\fi}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% Bibliography mangling.
|
|
% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/23}{Moved \cs{citename} definition for
|
|
% non-natbib bibliography, so a package may redefine it}
|
|
% \changes{v1.48}{2017/09/23}{\cs{citeyear} no longer behaves like
|
|
% \cs{citeyearpar}}
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\if@ACM@natbib
|
|
\let\citeN\cite
|
|
\let\cite\citep
|
|
\let\citeANP\citeauthor
|
|
\let\citeNN\citeyearpar
|
|
\let\citeyearNP\citeyear
|
|
\let\citeNP\citealt
|
|
\DeclareRobustCommand\citeA
|
|
{\begingroup\NAT@swafalse
|
|
\let\NAT@ctype\@ne\NAT@partrue\NAT@fullfalse\NAT@open\NAT@citetp}%
|
|
\providecommand\newblock{}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\AtBeginDocument{%
|
|
\let\shortcite\cite%
|
|
\providecommand\citename[1]{#1}}
|
|
\fi
|
|
\newcommand\shortcite[2][]{%
|
|
\ifNAT@numbers\cite[#1]{#2}\else\citeyearpar[#1]{#2}\fi}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\bibliographystyle}
|
|
% \changes{v1.13}{2016/06/06}{Redefined macro}
|
|
% The |amsart| package redefines \cs{bibliographystyle} since it
|
|
% prefers the AMS bibliography style. We turn it back to the
|
|
% \LaTeX\ definition:
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\bibliographystyle#1{%
|
|
\ifx\@begindocumenthook\@undefined\else
|
|
\expandafter\AtBeginDocument
|
|
\fi
|
|
{\if@filesw
|
|
\immediate\write\@auxout{\string\bibstyle{#1}}%
|
|
\fi}}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% Graphics and color.
|
|
% \changes{1.48}{2017/10/22}{Added prologue option to xcolor}
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\RequirePackage{graphicx}
|
|
\RequirePackage[prologue]{xcolor}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% We define ACM colors according to~\cite{ACMIdentityStandards}:
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\definecolor[named]{ACMBlue}{cmyk}{1,0.1,0,0.1}
|
|
\definecolor[named]{ACMYellow}{cmyk}{0,0.16,1,0}
|
|
\definecolor[named]{ACMOrange}{cmyk}{0,0.42,1,0.01}
|
|
\definecolor[named]{ACMRed}{cmyk}{0,0.90,0.86,0}
|
|
\definecolor[named]{ACMLightBlue}{cmyk}{0.49,0.01,0,0}
|
|
\definecolor[named]{ACMGreen}{cmyk}{0.20,0,1,0.19}
|
|
\definecolor[named]{ACMPurple}{cmyk}{0.55,1,0,0.15}
|
|
\definecolor[named]{ACMDarkBlue}{cmyk}{1,0.58,0,0.21}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% Author-draft mode
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\if@ACM@authordraft
|
|
\RequirePackage{draftwatermark}
|
|
\SetWatermarkFontSize{0.5in}
|
|
\SetWatermarkColor[gray]{.9}
|
|
\SetWatermarkText{\parbox{12em}{\centering
|
|
Unpublished working draft.\\
|
|
Not for distribution.}}
|
|
\fi
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
%\subsection{Paper size and paragraphing}
|
|
%\label{sec:paper}
|
|
%
|
|
% \changes{v1.17}{2016/07/07}{Slightly decreased margins for sigs}
|
|
% \changes{v1.29}{2017/01/22}{Increased head to 13pt}
|
|
% \changes{v1.40}{2017/07/15}{Added heightrounded to geometry}
|
|
% We use |geometry| for dimensions. Note that the present margins do not
|
|
% depend on the font size option---we might need to change this.
|
|
% See \url{https://github.com/borisveytsman/acmart/issues/5#issuecomment-272881329}.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\RequirePackage{geometry}
|
|
\ifcase\ACM@format@nr
|
|
\relax % manuscript
|
|
\geometry{letterpaper,head=13pt,
|
|
marginparwidth=6pc,heightrounded}%
|
|
\or % acmsmall
|
|
\geometry{twoside=true,
|
|
includeheadfoot, head=13pt, foot=2pc,
|
|
paperwidth=6.75in, paperheight=10in,
|
|
top=58pt, bottom=44pt, inner=46pt, outer=46pt,
|
|
marginparwidth=2pc,heightrounded
|
|
}%
|
|
\or % acmlarge
|
|
\geometry{twoside=true, head=13pt, foot=2pc,
|
|
paperwidth=8.5in, paperheight=11in,
|
|
includeheadfoot,
|
|
top=78pt, bottom=114pt, inner=81pt, outer=81pt,
|
|
marginparwidth=4pc,heightrounded
|
|
}%
|
|
\or % acmtog
|
|
\geometry{twoside=true, head=13pt, foot=2pc,
|
|
paperwidth=8.5in, paperheight=11in,
|
|
includeheadfoot, columnsep=24pt,
|
|
top=52pt, bottom=75pt, inner=52pt, outer=52pt,
|
|
marginparwidth=2pc,heightrounded
|
|
}%
|
|
\or % sigconf
|
|
\geometry{twoside=true, head=13pt,
|
|
paperwidth=8.5in, paperheight=11in,
|
|
includeheadfoot, columnsep=2pc,
|
|
top=57pt, bottom=73pt, inner=54pt, outer=54pt,
|
|
marginparwidth=2pc,heightrounded
|
|
}%
|
|
\or % siggraph
|
|
\geometry{twoside=true, head=13pt,
|
|
paperwidth=8.5in, paperheight=11in,
|
|
includeheadfoot, columnsep=2pc,
|
|
top=57pt, bottom=73pt, inner=54pt, outer=54pt,
|
|
marginparwidth=2pc,heightrounded
|
|
}%
|
|
\or % sigplan
|
|
\geometry{twoside=true, head=13pt,
|
|
paperwidth=8.5in, paperheight=11in,
|
|
includeheadfoot=false, columnsep=2pc,
|
|
top=1in, bottom=1in, inner=0.75in, outer=0.75in,
|
|
marginparwidth=2pc,heightrounded
|
|
}%
|
|
\or % sigchi
|
|
\geometry{twoside=true, head=13pt,
|
|
paperwidth=8.5in, paperheight=11in,
|
|
includeheadfoot, columnsep=2pc,
|
|
top=66pt, bottom=73pt, inner=54pt, outer=54pt,
|
|
marginparwidth=2pc,heightrounded
|
|
}%
|
|
\or % sigchi-a
|
|
\geometry{twoside=false, head=13pt,
|
|
paperwidth=11in, paperheight=8.5in,
|
|
includeheadfoot, marginparsep=72pt,
|
|
marginparwidth=170pt, columnsep=20pt,
|
|
top=72pt, bottom=72pt, left=314pt, right=72pt
|
|
}%
|
|
\@mparswitchfalse
|
|
\reversemarginpar
|
|
\fi
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\parindent}
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\parskip}
|
|
% Paragraphing
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\setlength\parindent{10\p@}
|
|
\setlength\parskip{\z@}
|
|
\ifcase\ACM@format@nr
|
|
\relax % manuscript
|
|
\or % acmsmall
|
|
\or % acmlarge
|
|
\or % acmtog
|
|
\setlength\parindent{9\p@}%
|
|
\or % sigconf
|
|
\or % siggraph
|
|
\or % sigplan
|
|
\or % sigchi
|
|
\or % sigchi-a
|
|
\fi
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\normalparindent}
|
|
% \changes{v1.37}{2017/05/13}{Set \cs{normalparindent} (Matthew Fluet)}%
|
|
% The |amsart| package defines the \cs{normalparindent} length and
|
|
% initializes it to 12pt (the value of \cs{parindent} in |amsart|). It
|
|
% is later used to set the \cs{listparindent} length in the |quotation|
|
|
% environment and the \cs{parindent} length in the \cs{@footnotetext}
|
|
% command. We set \cs{normalparindent} to the value of \cs{parindent}
|
|
% as selected by |acmart| for consistent paragraph indents.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\setlength\normalparindent{\parindent}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% Footnotes require some consideration. We have several layers of
|
|
% footnotes: frontmatter footnotes, ``regular'' footnotes and the
|
|
% special insert for the bibstrip. In the old ACM classes, the bibstrip
|
|
% was a \cs{@float}. The problem with floats is that they tend to, well,
|
|
% float---and we want the guarantee they stay.
|
|
%
|
|
% We use |manyfoot| for layered footnotes instead.
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\copyrightpermissionfootnoterule}
|
|
% \changes{v1.12}{2016/05/30}{Added macro}
|
|
% This is the footnote rule that separates the bibstrip from the rest of
|
|
% the paper. It is a full width rule.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\copyrightpermissionfootnoterule{\kern-3\p@
|
|
\hrule \@width \columnwidth \kern 2.6\p@}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\RequirePackage{manyfoot}
|
|
\SelectFootnoteRule[2]{copyrightpermission}
|
|
\DeclareNewFootnote{authorsaddresses}
|
|
\SelectFootnoteRule[2]{copyrightpermission}
|
|
\DeclareNewFootnote{copyrightpermission}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\footnoterule}
|
|
% \changes{v1.12}{2016/05/30}{Made shorter}
|
|
% Tschichold's rules:
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\footnoterule{\kern-3\p@
|
|
\hrule \@width 4pc \kern 2.6\p@}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\endminipage}
|
|
% We do not use footnote rules in minipages
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\endminipage{%
|
|
\par
|
|
\unskip
|
|
\ifvoid\@mpfootins\else
|
|
\vskip\skip\@mpfootins
|
|
\normalcolor
|
|
\unvbox\@mpfootins
|
|
\fi
|
|
\@minipagefalse
|
|
\color@endgroup
|
|
\egroup
|
|
\expandafter\@iiiparbox\@mpargs{\unvbox\@tempboxa}}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@makefntext}
|
|
% We do not use indentation for footnotes
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@makefntext{\noindent\@makefnmark}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@footnotetext}
|
|
% In |sigchi-a| mode our footnotes are in the margin!
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\if@ACM@sigchiamode
|
|
\long\def\@footnotetext#1{\marginpar{%
|
|
\reset@font\small
|
|
\interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
|
|
\protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
|
|
\csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark
|
|
}%
|
|
\color@begingroup
|
|
\@makefntext{%
|
|
\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces#1\@finalstrut\strutbox}%
|
|
\color@endgroup}}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@mpfootnotetext}
|
|
% \changes{v1.13}{2016/06/06}{Made minipage footnotes centered}
|
|
% We want the footnotes in minipages centered:
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\long\def\@mpfootnotetext#1{%
|
|
\global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox{%
|
|
\unvbox\@mpfootins
|
|
\reset@font\footnotesize
|
|
\hsize\columnwidth
|
|
\@parboxrestore
|
|
\protected@edef\@currentlabel
|
|
{\csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
|
|
\color@begingroup\centering
|
|
\@makefntext{%
|
|
\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces#1\@finalstrut\strutbox}%
|
|
\color@endgroup}}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@makefnmark}
|
|
% \changes{v1.17}{2016/067/09}{Redefined}
|
|
% AMS classes use a buggy definition of \cs{makefnmark}. We revert
|
|
% to the standard one.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@makefnmark{\hbox{\@textsuperscript{\normalfont\@thefnmark}}}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@textbottom}
|
|
% \changes{v1.31}{2017/03/04}{Redefined}
|
|
% Add some stretch according to David Carlisle's advice at
|
|
% \url{http://tex.stackexchange.com/a/62318/5522}
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@textbottom{\vskip \z@ \@plus 1pt}
|
|
\let\@texttop\relax
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%\subsection{Fonts}
|
|
%\label{sec:fonts}
|
|
%
|
|
% \changes{v1.12}{2016/05/30}{Added graceful behavior when libertine
|
|
% fonts are absent}
|
|
% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/29}{Added cmap and glyphtounicode}
|
|
% \changes{v1.40}{2017/05/27}{Added Ross Moore code for glyphtounicode}
|
|
%
|
|
% Somehow PDFTeX and XeTeX require different incantations to make a PDF
|
|
% compliant with the current Acrobat bugs. Xpdf is much better.
|
|
%
|
|
% The code below is by Ross Moore.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\RequirePackage{iftex}
|
|
\ifPDFTeX
|
|
\input{glyphtounicode}
|
|
\pdfglyphtounicode{f_f}{FB00}
|
|
\pdfglyphtounicode{f_f_i}{FB03}
|
|
\pdfglyphtounicode{f_f_l}{FB04}
|
|
\pdfglyphtounicode{f_i}{FB01}
|
|
\pdfglyphtounicode{t_t}{00740074}
|
|
\pdfglyphtounicode{f_t}{00660074}
|
|
\pdfglyphtounicode{T_h}{00540068}
|
|
\pdfgentounicode=1
|
|
\fi
|
|
\RequirePackage{cmap}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\if@ACM@newfonts}
|
|
% \changes{v1.12}{2016/05/30}{Added macro}%
|
|
% Whether we load the new fonts
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\newif\if@ACM@newfonts
|
|
\@ACM@newfontstrue
|
|
\IfFileExists{libertine.sty}{}{\ClassWarning{\@classname}{You do not
|
|
have the libertine package installed. Please upgrade your
|
|
TeX}\@ACM@newfontsfalse}
|
|
\IfFileExists{zi4.sty}{}{\ClassWarning{\@classname}{You do not
|
|
have the zi4 package installed. Please upgrade your
|
|
TeX}\@ACM@newfontsfalse}
|
|
\IfFileExists{newtxmath.sty}{}{\ClassWarning{\@classname}{You do not
|
|
have the newtxmath package installed. Please upgrade your
|
|
TeX}\@ACM@newfontsfalse}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \changes{v1.30}{2017/02/15}{Switched to T1: looks like libertine has
|
|
% problems with \cs{l} in OT1}%
|
|
% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/12}{Switched to Type~1 fonts for libertine
|
|
% even if OTF-capable engine is used (Kai Mindermann)}
|
|
% We use Libertine throughout.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\if@ACM@newfonts
|
|
\RequirePackage[tt=false, type1=true]{libertine}
|
|
\RequirePackage[varqu]{zi4}
|
|
\RequirePackage[libertine]{newtxmath}
|
|
\RequirePackage[T1]{fontenc}
|
|
\fi
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\liningnums}
|
|
% \changes{v1.46}{2017/08/28}{Workaround for compatibility with fontspec}
|
|
% Libertine defines \cs{liningnums}, which makes |fontspec| unhappy.
|
|
% While we do not use |fontspec|, some users do.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\let\liningnums\@undefined
|
|
\AtEndPreamble{%
|
|
\DeclareTextFontCommand{\liningnums}{\libertineLF}}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% The SIGCHI extended abstracts are sans serif:
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\if@ACM@sigchiamode
|
|
\renewcommand{\familydefault}{\sfdefault}
|
|
\fi
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
%\subsection{Floats}
|
|
%\label{sec:floats}
|
|
%
|
|
% We use the |caption| package
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\RequirePackage{caption, float}
|
|
\captionsetup[table]{position=top}
|
|
\if@ACM@journal
|
|
\captionsetup{labelfont={sf, small},
|
|
textfont={sf, small}, margin=\z@}
|
|
\captionsetup[figure]{name={Fig.}}
|
|
\else
|
|
\captionsetup{labelfont={bf},
|
|
textfont={bf}, labelsep=colon, margin=\z@}
|
|
\ifcase\ACM@format@nr
|
|
\relax % manuscript
|
|
\or % acmsmall
|
|
\or % acmlarge
|
|
\or % acmtog
|
|
\or % sigconf
|
|
\or % siggraph
|
|
\captionsetup{textfont={it}}
|
|
\or % sigplan
|
|
\captionsetup{labelfont={bf},
|
|
textfont={normalfont}, labelsep=period, margin=\z@}
|
|
\or % sigchi
|
|
\captionsetup[figure]{labelfont={bf, small},
|
|
textfont={bf, small}}
|
|
\or % sigchi-a
|
|
\captionsetup[figure]{labelfont={bf, small},
|
|
textfont={bf, small}}
|
|
\fi
|
|
\fi
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{sidebar}
|
|
% The |sidebar| environment:
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\newfloat{sidebar}{}{sbar}
|
|
\floatname{sidebar}{Sidebar}
|
|
\renewenvironment{sidebar}{\Collect@Body\@sidebar}{}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@sidebar}
|
|
% The processing of the saved text
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\long\def\@sidebar#1{\bgroup\captionsetup{type=sidebar}%
|
|
\marginpar{\small#1}\egroup}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{marginfigure}
|
|
% The |marginfigure| environment:
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\newenvironment{marginfigure}{\Collect@Body\@marginfigure}{}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@marginfigure}
|
|
% \changes{v1.12}{2016/05/30}{Now centering by default}
|
|
% The processing of the saved text
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\long\def\@marginfigure#1{\bgroup\captionsetup{type=figure}%
|
|
\marginpar{\centering\small#1}\egroup}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{margintable}
|
|
% The |margintable| environment:
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\newenvironment{margintable}{\Collect@Body\@margintable}{}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@margintable}
|
|
% \changes{v1.12}{2016/05/30}{Now centering by default}
|
|
% The processing of the saved text
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\long\def\@margintable#1{\bgroup\captionsetup{type=table}%
|
|
\marginpar{\centering\small#1}\egroup}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% SIGCHI extended abstracts provide an interesting possibility to push
|
|
% into the margin. Here we use |figure*| and |table*| for this.
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\fulltextwidth}
|
|
% We define the width of the boxes as
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\newdimen\fulltextwidth
|
|
\fulltextwidth=\dimexpr(\textwidth+\marginparwidth+\marginparsep)
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@dblfloat}
|
|
% We redefine the double-float command. First, we make the size
|
|
% bigger. Second, our default position is going to be |tp| (to give
|
|
% marginalia a chance)
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\if@ACM@sigchiamode
|
|
\def\@dblfloat{\bgroup\columnwidth=\fulltextwidth
|
|
\let\@endfloatbox\@endwidefloatbox
|
|
\def\@fpsadddefault{\def\@fps{tp}}%
|
|
\@float}
|
|
\fi
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\end@dblfloat}
|
|
% And the end. Just adding a \cs{bgroup}.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\if@ACM@sigchiamode
|
|
\def\end@dblfloat{%
|
|
\end@float\egroup}
|
|
\fi
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@endwidefloatbox}
|
|
% This is the end of a wide box---we basically move everything
|
|
% to the left
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@endwidefloatbox{%
|
|
\par\vskip\z@skip
|
|
\@minipagefalse
|
|
\outer@nobreak
|
|
\egroup
|
|
\color@endbox
|
|
\global\setbox\@currbox=\vbox{\moveleft
|
|
\dimexpr(\fulltextwidth-\textwidth)\box\@currbox}%
|
|
\wd\@currbox=\textwidth
|
|
}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
%\subsection{Lists}
|
|
%\label{sec:lists}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\ifcase\ACM@format@nr
|
|
\relax % manuscript
|
|
\or % acmsmall
|
|
\or % acmlarge
|
|
\or % acmtog
|
|
\or % sigconf
|
|
\or % siggraph
|
|
\or % sigplan
|
|
\def\labelenumi{\theenumi.}
|
|
\def\labelenumii{\theenumii.}
|
|
\def\labelenumiii{\theenumiii.}
|
|
\def\labelenumiv{\theenumiv.}
|
|
\or % sigchi
|
|
\or % sigchi-a
|
|
\fi
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \changes{v1.37}{2017/05/13}{Reduce list indentation (Matthew Fluet)}%
|
|
% The AMS uses generous margins for lists. Note that |amsart| defines
|
|
% \cs{leftmargin} values for list levels at the beginning of the
|
|
% document, so we must redefine them in the same manner. Also, note that
|
|
% |amsart| redefines the |enumerate| and |itemize| environments with a
|
|
% \cs{makelabel} command that uses \cs{llap}, so the \cs{labelwidth}
|
|
% value is~(effectively) irrelevant; nonetheless, we follow |amsart|
|
|
% and set \cs{labelwidth} to \cs{leftmargin} minus \cs{labelsep}.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\newdimen\@ACM@labelwidth
|
|
\AtBeginDocument{%
|
|
\setlength\labelsep{4pt}
|
|
\setlength{\@ACM@labelwidth}{6.5pt}
|
|
|
|
%% First-level list: when beginning after the first line of an
|
|
%% indented paragraph or ending before an indented paragraph, labels
|
|
%% should not hang to the left of the preceding/following text.
|
|
\setlength\leftmargini{\z@}
|
|
\addtolength\leftmargini{\parindent}
|
|
\addtolength\leftmargini{2\labelsep}
|
|
\addtolength\leftmargini{\@ACM@labelwidth}
|
|
|
|
%% Second-level and higher lists.
|
|
\setlength\leftmarginii{\z@}
|
|
\addtolength\leftmarginii{0.5\labelsep}
|
|
\addtolength\leftmarginii{\@ACM@labelwidth}
|
|
\setlength\leftmarginiii{\leftmarginii}
|
|
\setlength\leftmarginiv{\leftmarginiii}
|
|
\setlength\leftmarginv{\leftmarginiv}
|
|
\setlength\leftmarginvi{\leftmarginv}
|
|
\@listi}
|
|
\newskip\listisep
|
|
\listisep\smallskipamount
|
|
\def\@listI{\leftmargin\leftmargini
|
|
\labelwidth\leftmargini \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
|
|
\listparindent\z@
|
|
\topsep\listisep}
|
|
\let\@listi\@listI
|
|
\def\@listii{\leftmargin\leftmarginii
|
|
\labelwidth\leftmarginii \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
|
|
\topsep\z@skip}
|
|
\def\@listiii{\leftmargin\leftmarginiii
|
|
\labelwidth\leftmarginiii \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep}
|
|
\def\@listiv{\leftmargin\leftmarginiv
|
|
\labelwidth\leftmarginiv \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep}
|
|
\def\@listv{\leftmargin\leftmarginv
|
|
\labelwidth\leftmarginv \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep}
|
|
\def\@listvi{\leftmargin\leftmarginvi
|
|
\labelwidth\leftmarginvi \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\descriptionlabel}
|
|
% \changes{v1.37}{2017/05/13}{Reduce list indentation (Matthew Fluet)}%
|
|
% \changes{v1.12}{2016/05/30}{Redefined}
|
|
% We do not use a colon by default like |amsart| does:
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\renewcommand{\descriptionlabel}[1]{\upshape\bfseries #1}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\description}
|
|
% \changes{v1.37}{2017/05/13}{Reduce list indentation (Matthew Fluet)}%
|
|
% \changes{v1.17}{2016/07/07}{Decreased indent}
|
|
% Make the |description| environment indentation consistent with that of
|
|
% the |itemize| and |enumerate| environments.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\renewenvironment{description}{\list{}{%
|
|
\labelwidth\@ACM@labelwidth
|
|
\let\makelabel\descriptionlabel}%
|
|
}{
|
|
\endlist
|
|
}
|
|
\let\enddescription=\endlist % for efficiency
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
%\subsection{Top-matter data}
|
|
%\label{sec:top_matter_data}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \changes{v1.24}{2016/11/16}{Add IMWUT journal option}
|
|
% \changes{v1.25}{2016/12/03}{Updated PACMPL}
|
|
% \changes{v1.30}{2017/02/15}{Updated IMWUT and PACMPL}
|
|
% \changes{v1.36}{2017/05/13}{Added PACMHCI journal options}
|
|
% \changes{v1.46}{2017/08/25}{PACM now set screen to true}
|
|
%
|
|
% We use the |xkeyval| interface to define journal titles and the relevant
|
|
% information
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\define@choicekey*+{ACM}{acmJournal}[\@journalCode\@journalCode@nr]{%
|
|
CIE,%
|
|
CSUR,%
|
|
DTRAP,%
|
|
IMWUT,%
|
|
JACM,%
|
|
JDIQ,%
|
|
JEA,%
|
|
JERIC,%
|
|
JETC,%
|
|
JOCCH,%
|
|
PACMHCI,%
|
|
PACMPL,%
|
|
POMACS,%
|
|
TAAS,%
|
|
TACCESS,%
|
|
TACO,%
|
|
TALG,%
|
|
TALLIP,%
|
|
TAP,%
|
|
TCPS,%
|
|
TEAC,%
|
|
TECS,%
|
|
THRI,%
|
|
TIIS,%
|
|
TISSEC,%
|
|
TIST,%
|
|
TKDD,%
|
|
TMIS,%
|
|
TOCE,%
|
|
TOCHI,%
|
|
TOCL,%
|
|
TOCS,%
|
|
TOCT,%
|
|
TODAES,%
|
|
TODS,%
|
|
TOG,%
|
|
TOIS,%
|
|
TOIT,%
|
|
TOMACS,%
|
|
TOMM,%
|
|
TOMPECS,%
|
|
TOMS,%
|
|
TOPC,%
|
|
TOPS,%
|
|
TOPLAS,%
|
|
TOS,%
|
|
TOSEM,%
|
|
TOSN,%
|
|
TRETS,%
|
|
TSAS,%
|
|
TSC,%
|
|
TSLP,%
|
|
TWEB%
|
|
}{%
|
|
\ifcase\@journalCode@nr
|
|
\relax % CIE
|
|
\def\@journalName{ACM Computers in Entertainment}%
|
|
\def\@journalNameShort{ACM Comput. Entertain.}%
|
|
\def\@permissionCodeOne{1544-3574}%
|
|
\or % CSUR
|
|
\def\@journalName{ACM Computing Surveys}%
|
|
\def\@journalNameShort{ACM Comput. Surv.}%
|
|
\def\@permissionCodeOne{0360-0300}%
|
|
\or % DTRAP
|
|
\def\@journalName{Digital Threats: Research and Practice}%
|
|
\def\@journalNameShort{Digit. Threat. Res. Pract.}%
|
|
\def\@permissionCodeOne{2576-5337}%
|
|
\or % IMWUT
|
|
\def\@journalName{Proceedings of the ACM on Interactive, Mobile,
|
|
Wearable and Ubiquitous Technologies}%
|
|
\def\@journalNameShort{Proc. ACM Interact. Mob. Wearable Ubiquitous Technol.}%
|
|
\def\@permissionCodeOne{2474-9567}%
|
|
\@ACM@screentrue
|
|
\PackageInfo{\@classname}{Using screen mode due to \@journalCode}%
|
|
\or % JACM
|
|
\def\@journalName{Journal of the ACM}%
|
|
\def\@journalNameShort{J. ACM}%
|
|
\def\@permissionCodeOne{0004-5411}%
|
|
\or % JDIQ
|
|
\def\@journalName{ACM Journal of Data and Information Quality}%
|
|
\def\@journalNameShort{ACM J. Data Inform. Quality}%
|
|
\def\@permissionCodeOne{1936-1955}%
|
|
\or % JEA
|
|
\def\@journalName{ACM Journal of Experimental Algorithmics}%
|
|
\def\@journalNameShort{ACM J. Exp. Algor.}%
|
|
\def\@permissionCodeOne{1084-6654}%
|
|
\or % JERIC
|
|
\def\@journalName{ACM Journal of Educational Resources in Computing}%
|
|
\def\@journalNameShort{ACM J. Edu. Resources in Comput.}%
|
|
\def\@permissionCodeOne{1073-0516}%
|
|
\or % JETC
|
|
\def\@journalName{ACM Journal on Emerging Technologies in Computing Systems}%
|
|
\def\@journalNameShort{ACM J. Emerg. Technol. Comput. Syst.}%
|
|
\def\@permissionCodeOne{1550-4832}%
|
|
\or % JOCCH
|
|
\def\@journalName{ACM Journal on Computing and Cultural Heritage}%
|
|
\def\@journalNameShort{ACM J. Comput. Cult. Herit.}%
|
|
\or % PACMHCI
|
|
\def\@journalName{Proceedings of the ACM on Human-Computer Interaction}%
|
|
\def\@journalNameShort{Proc. ACM Hum.-Comput. Interact.}%
|
|
\def\@permissionCodeOne{2573-0142}%
|
|
\@ACM@screentrue
|
|
\PackageInfo{\@classname}{Using screen mode due to \@journalCode}%
|
|
\or % PACMPL
|
|
\def\@journalName{Proceedings of the ACM on Programming Languages}%
|
|
\def\@journalNameShort{Proc. ACM Program. Lang.}%
|
|
\def\@permissionCodeOne{2475-1421}%
|
|
\@ACM@screentrue
|
|
\PackageInfo{\@classname}{Using screen mode due to \@journalCode}%
|
|
\or % POMACS
|
|
\def\@journalName{Proceedings of the ACM on Measurement and Analysis of Computing Systems}%
|
|
\def\@journalNameShort{Proc. ACM Meas. Anal. Comput. Syst.}%
|
|
\def\@permissionCodeOne{2476-1249}%
|
|
\@ACM@screentrue
|
|
\PackageInfo{\@classname}{Using screen mode due to \@journalCode}%
|
|
\or % TAAS
|
|
\def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Autonomous and Adaptive Systems}%
|
|
\def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Autonom. Adapt. Syst.}%
|
|
\def\@permissionCodeOne{1556-4665}%
|
|
\or % TACCESS
|
|
\def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Accessible Computing}%
|
|
\def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Access. Comput.}%
|
|
\def\@permissionCodeOne{1936-7228}%
|
|
\or % TACO
|
|
\def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Architecture and Code Optimization}%
|
|
\def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Arch. Code Optim.}%
|
|
\or % TALG
|
|
\def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Algorithms}%
|
|
\def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Algor.}%
|
|
\def\@permissionCodeOne{1549-6325}%
|
|
\or % TALLIP
|
|
\def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Asian and Low-Resource Language Information Processing}%
|
|
\def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Asian Low-Resour. Lang. Inf. Process.}%
|
|
\def\@permissionCodeOne{2375-4699}%
|
|
\or % TAP
|
|
\def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Applied Perception}%
|
|
\or % TCPS
|
|
\def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Cyber-Physical Systems}%
|
|
\or % TEAC
|
|
\def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Economics and Computation}%
|
|
\or % TECS
|
|
\def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Embedded Computing Systems}%
|
|
\def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Embedd. Comput. Syst.}%
|
|
\def\@permissionCodeOne{1539-9087}%
|
|
\or % THRI
|
|
\def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Human-Robot Interaction}%
|
|
\def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Hum.-Robot Interact.}%
|
|
\def\@permissionCodeOne{2573-9522}%
|
|
\or % TIIS
|
|
\def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Interactive Intelligent Systems}%
|
|
\def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Interact. Intell. Syst.}%
|
|
\def\@permissionCodeOne{2160-6455}%
|
|
\or % TISSEC
|
|
\def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Information and System Security}%
|
|
\def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Info. Syst. Sec.}%
|
|
\def\@permissionCodeOne{1094-9224}%
|
|
\or % TIST
|
|
\def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Intelligent Systems and Technology}%
|
|
\def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Intell. Syst. Technol.}%
|
|
\def\@permissionCodeOne{2157-6904}%
|
|
\or % TKDD
|
|
\def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Knowledge Discovery from Data}%
|
|
\def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Knowl. Discov. Data.}%
|
|
\def\@permissionCodeOne{1556-4681}%
|
|
\or % TMIS
|
|
\def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Management Information Systems}%
|
|
\def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Manag. Inform. Syst.}%
|
|
\def\@permissionCodeOne{2158-656X}%
|
|
\or % TOCE
|
|
\def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Computing Education}%
|
|
\def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Comput. Educ.}%
|
|
\def\@permissionCodeOne{1946-6226}%
|
|
\or % TOCHI
|
|
\def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Computer-Human Interaction}%
|
|
\def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Comput.-Hum. Interact.}%
|
|
\def\@permissionCodeOne{1073-0516}%
|
|
\or % TOCL
|
|
\def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Computational Logic}%
|
|
\def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Comput. Logic}%
|
|
\def\@permissionCodeOne{1529-3785}%
|
|
\or % TOCS
|
|
\def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Computer Systems}%
|
|
\def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Comput. Syst.}%
|
|
\def\@permissionCodeOne{0734-2071}%
|
|
\or % TOCT
|
|
\def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Computation Theory}%
|
|
\def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Comput. Theory}%
|
|
\def\@permissionCodeOne{1942-3454}%
|
|
\or % TODAES
|
|
\def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Design Automation of Electronic Systems}%
|
|
\def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Des. Autom. Electron. Syst.}%
|
|
\def\@permissionCodeOne{1084-4309}%
|
|
\or % TODS
|
|
\def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Database Systems}%
|
|
\def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Datab. Syst.}%
|
|
\def\@permissionCodeOne{0362-5915}%
|
|
\or % TOG
|
|
\def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Graphics}%
|
|
\def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Graph.}%
|
|
\def\@permissionCodeOne{0730-0301}
|
|
\or % TOIS
|
|
\def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Information Systems}%
|
|
\def\@permissionCodeOne{1046-8188}%
|
|
\or % TOIT
|
|
\def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Internet Technology}%
|
|
\def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Internet Technol.}%
|
|
\def\@permissionCodeOne{1533-5399}%
|
|
\or % TOMACS
|
|
\def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Modeling and Computer Simulation}%
|
|
\def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Model. Comput. Simul.}%
|
|
\or % TOMM
|
|
\def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Multimedia Computing, Communications and Applications}%
|
|
\def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Multimedia Comput. Commun. Appl.}%
|
|
\def\@permissionCodeOne{1551-6857}%
|
|
\def\@permissionCodeTwo{0100}%
|
|
\or % TOMPECS
|
|
\def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Modeling and Performance Evaluation of Computing Systems}%
|
|
\def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Model. Perform. Eval. Comput. Syst.}%
|
|
\def\@permissionCodeOne{2376-3639}%
|
|
\or % TOMS
|
|
\def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Mathematical Software}%
|
|
\def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Math. Softw.}%
|
|
\def\@permissionCodeOne{0098-3500}%
|
|
\or % TOPC
|
|
\def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Parallel Computing}%
|
|
\def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Parallel Comput.}%
|
|
\def\@permissionCodeOne{1539-9087}%
|
|
\or % TOPS
|
|
\def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Privacy and Security}%
|
|
\def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Priv. Sec.}%
|
|
\def\@permissionCodeOne{2471-2566}%
|
|
\or % TOPLAS
|
|
\def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Programming Languages and Systems}%
|
|
\def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Program. Lang. Syst.}%
|
|
\def\@permissionCodeOne{0164-0925}%
|
|
\or % TOS
|
|
\def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Storage}%
|
|
\def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Storage}%
|
|
\def\@permissionCodeOne{1553-3077}%
|
|
\or % TOSEM
|
|
\def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Software Engineering and Methodology}%
|
|
\def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Softw. Eng. Methodol.}%
|
|
\def\@permissionCodeOne{1049-331X}%
|
|
\or % TOSN
|
|
\def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Sensor Networks}%
|
|
\def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Sensor Netw.}%
|
|
\def\@permissionCodeOne{1550-4859}%
|
|
\or % TRETS
|
|
\def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Reconfigurable Technology and Systems}%
|
|
\def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Reconfig. Technol. Syst.}%
|
|
\def\@permissionCodeOne{1936-7406}%
|
|
\or % TSAS
|
|
\def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Spatial Algorithms and Systems}%
|
|
\def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Spatial Algorithms Syst.}%
|
|
\def\@permissionCodeOne{2374-0353}%
|
|
\or % TSC
|
|
\def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Social Computing}%
|
|
\def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Soc. Comput.}%
|
|
\def\@permissionCodeOne{2469-7818}%
|
|
\or % TSLP
|
|
\def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Speech and Language Processing}%
|
|
\def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Speech Lang. Process.}%
|
|
\def\@permissionCodeOne{1550-4875}%
|
|
\or % TWEB
|
|
\def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on the Web}%
|
|
\def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Web}%
|
|
\def\@permissionCodeOne{1559-1131}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\ClassInfo{\@classname}{Using journal code \@journalCode}%
|
|
}{%
|
|
\ClassError{\@classname}{Incorrect journal #1}%
|
|
}%
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\acmJournal}
|
|
% And the syntactic sugar around it
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\acmJournal#1{\setkeys{ACM}{acmJournal=#1}}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% The defaults:
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@journalCode@nr{0}
|
|
\def\@journalName{}%
|
|
\def\@journalNameShort{\@journalName}%
|
|
\def\@permissionCodeOne{XXXX-XXXX}%
|
|
\def\@permissionCodeTwo{}%
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\acmConference}
|
|
% This is the conference command
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\newcommand\acmConference[4][]{%
|
|
\gdef\acmConference@shortname{#1}%
|
|
\gdef\acmConference@name{#2}%
|
|
\gdef\acmConference@date{#3}%
|
|
\gdef\acmConference@venue{#4}%
|
|
\ifx\acmConference@shortname\@empty
|
|
\gdef\acmConference@shortname{#2}%
|
|
\fi}
|
|
\acmConference[Conference'17]{ACM Conference}{July 2017}{Washington,
|
|
DC, USA}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\acmBooktitle}
|
|
% \changes{v1.44}{2017/08/11}{Added macro}
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@acmBooktitle}
|
|
% \changes{v1.44}{2017/08/11}{Added macro}
|
|
% The book title of the conference:
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\acmBooktitle#1{\gdef\@acmBooktitle{#1}}
|
|
\acmBooktitle{Proceedings of \acmConference@name
|
|
\ifx\acmConference@name\acmConference@shortname\else
|
|
\ (\acmConference@shortname)\fi}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@editorsAbbrev}
|
|
% \changes{v1.44}{2017/08/11}{Added macro}
|
|
% How to abbreviate editors
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@editorsAbbrev{(Ed.)}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@acmEditors}
|
|
% \changes{v1.44}{2017/08/11}{Added macro}
|
|
% The list of editors
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@acmEditors{}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\editor}
|
|
% \changes{v1.44}{2017/08/11}{Added macro}
|
|
% Add a new editor to the list
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\editor#1{\ifx\@acmEditors\@empty
|
|
\gdef\@acmEditors{#1}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\gdef\@editorsAbbrev{(Eds.)}%
|
|
\g@addto@macro\@acmEditors{\and#1}%
|
|
\fi}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\subtitle}
|
|
% The subtitle macro
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\subtitle#1{\def\@subtitle{#1}}
|
|
\subtitle{}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\num@authorgroups}
|
|
% \changes{v1.15}{2016/06/25}{Renamed}
|
|
% The total number of ``groups''. Each group is several authors with
|
|
% the same affiliations(s)
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\newcount\num@authorgroups
|
|
\num@authorgroups=0\relax
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\num@authors}
|
|
% \changes{v1.46}{2017/08/27}{Introduced macro}
|
|
% The total number of authors
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\newcount\num@authors
|
|
\num@authors=0\relax
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\if@insideauthorgroup}
|
|
% \changes{v1.15}{2016/06/25}{Introduced macro}
|
|
% Whether we are continuing an author group
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\newif\if@insideauthorgroup
|
|
\@insideauthorgroupfalse
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\author}
|
|
% \changes{v1.15}{2016/06/25}{Added code for author groups}
|
|
% \changes{v1.46}{2017/08/27}{Started counting authors}
|
|
% Adding an author to the list of authors and addresses
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\renewcommand\author[2][]{%
|
|
\global\advance\num@authors by 1\relax
|
|
\if@insideauthorgroup\else
|
|
\global\advance\num@authorgroups by 1\relax
|
|
\global\@insideauthorgrouptrue
|
|
\fi
|
|
\ifx\addresses\@empty
|
|
\if@ACM@anonymous
|
|
\gdef\addresses{\@author{Anonymous Author(s)}}%
|
|
\gdef\authors{Anonymous Author(s)}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\gdef\addresses{\@author{#2}}%
|
|
\gdef\authors{#2}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\else
|
|
\if@ACM@anonymous\else
|
|
\g@addto@macro\addresses{\and\@author{#2}}%
|
|
\g@addto@macro\authors{\and#2}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\fi
|
|
\if@ACM@anonymous
|
|
\ifx\shortauthors\@empty
|
|
\gdef\shortauthors{Anon.}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\else
|
|
\def\@tempa{#1}%
|
|
\ifx\@tempa\@empty
|
|
\ifx\shortauthors\@empty
|
|
\gdef\shortauthors{#2}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\g@addto@macro\shortauthors{\and#2}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\else
|
|
\ifx\shortauthors\@empty
|
|
\gdef\shortauthors{#1}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\g@addto@macro\shortauthors{\and#1}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\fi
|
|
\fi}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\affiliation}
|
|
% \changes{v1.15}{2016/06/25}{Added code for author groups}
|
|
% The macro \cs{affiliation} mimics \cs{address} from |amsart|.
|
|
% Note that it has an optional argument, which we use differently
|
|
% from |amsart|.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\newcommand{\affiliation}[2][]{%
|
|
\global\@insideauthorgroupfalse
|
|
\if@ACM@anonymous\else
|
|
\g@addto@macro\addresses{\affiliation{#1}{#2}}%
|
|
\fi}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\if@ACM@affiliation@obeypunctuation}
|
|
% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/28}{Added macro}
|
|
% Whether to use the author's punctuation (false by default, which adds
|
|
% American-style address punctuation)
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\define@boolkey+{@ACM@affiliation@}[@ACM@affiliation@]{obeypunctuation}%
|
|
[true]{}{\ClassError{\@classname}{The option obeypunctuation can be either true or false}}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\additionalaffiliation}
|
|
% \changes{v1.31}{2017/03/04}{Added macro}
|
|
% Additional affiliations go to footnotes
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\additionalaffiliation#1{\authornote{\@additionalaffiliation{#1}}}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@additionalaffiliation}
|
|
% \changes{v1.31}{2017/03/04}{Added macro}
|
|
% Process \cs{additionalaffiliation} inside \cs{authornote}
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@additionalaffiliation#1{\bgroup
|
|
\def\position##1{\ignorespaces}%
|
|
\def\institution##1{##1\ignorespaces}%
|
|
\def\department{\@ifnextchar[{\@department}{\@department[]}}%
|
|
\def\@department[##1]##2{\unskip, ##2\ignorespaces}%
|
|
\let\streetaddress\position
|
|
\let\city\position
|
|
\let\state\position
|
|
\let\postcode\position
|
|
\let\country\position
|
|
Also with #1\unskip.\egroup}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\email}
|
|
% The macro \cs{email} mimics \cs{email} from |amsart|.
|
|
% Again, it has an optional argument that we do not currently need
|
|
% but keep for possible future use.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\renewcommand{\email}[2][]{%
|
|
\if@ACM@anonymous\else
|
|
\g@addto@macro\addresses{\email{#1}{#2}}%
|
|
\fi}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\orcid}
|
|
% \changes{v1.15}{2016/06/25}{Introduced macro}
|
|
% Right now we do not typeset ORCIDs
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\orcid#1{\unskip\ignorespaces}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\authorsaddresses}
|
|
% \changes{v1.46}{2017/08/27}{Introduced macro}
|
|
% Setting up authors' addresses
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\authorsaddresses#1{\def\@authorsaddresses{#1}}
|
|
\authorsaddresses{\@mkauthorsaddresses}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@titlenotes}
|
|
% The title notes
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@titlenotes{}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\titlenote}
|
|
% Adding a note to the title
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\titlenote#1{%
|
|
\g@addto@macro\@title{\footnotemark}%
|
|
\if@ACM@anonymous
|
|
\g@addto@macro\@titlenotes{%
|
|
\stepcounter{footnote}\footnotetext{Title note}}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\g@addto@macro\@titlenotes{\stepcounter{footnote}\footnotetext{#1}}%
|
|
\fi}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@subtitlenotes}
|
|
% The subtitle notes
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@subtitlenotes{}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\subtitlenote}
|
|
% Adding a note to the subtitle
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\subtitlenote#1{%
|
|
\g@addto@macro\@subtitle{\footnotemark}%
|
|
\if@ACM@anonymous
|
|
\g@addto@macro\@subtitlenotes{%
|
|
\stepcounter{footnote}\footnotetext{Subtitle note}}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\g@addto@macro\@subtitlenotes{%
|
|
\stepcounter{footnote}\footnotetext{#1}}%
|
|
\fi}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@authornotes}
|
|
% The author notes
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@authornotes{}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\authornote}
|
|
% Adding a note to the author
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\authornote#1{%
|
|
\if@ACM@anonymous\else
|
|
\g@addto@macro\addresses{\@authornotemark}%
|
|
\g@addto@macro\@authornotes{%
|
|
\stepcounter{footnote}\footnotetext{#1}}%
|
|
\fi}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\authornotemark}
|
|
% \changes{v1.39}{2017/05/14}{Added macro}
|
|
% Adding a footnote mark to the authors
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\newcommand\authornotemark[1][\relax]{%
|
|
\ifx#1\relax\relax\relax
|
|
\g@addto@macro\addresses{\@authornotemark}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\g@addto@macro\addresses{\@@authornotemark{#1}}%
|
|
\fi}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\acmVolume}
|
|
% \changes{v1.17}{2016/07/10}{The default is now numerical}
|
|
% The current volume
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\acmVolume#1{\def\@acmVolume{#1}}
|
|
\acmVolume{1}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\acmNumber}
|
|
% \changes{v1.17}{2016/07/10}{The default is now numerical}
|
|
% The current number
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\acmNumber#1{\def\@acmNumber{#1}}
|
|
\acmNumber{1}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\acmArticle}
|
|
% \changes{v1.17}{2016/07/10}{The default is now numerical}
|
|
% \changes{v1.44}{2017/08/111}{The default is now empty}
|
|
% The current article
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\acmArticle#1{\def\@acmArticle{#1}}
|
|
\acmArticle{}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\acmArticleSeq}
|
|
% \changes{v1.04}{2016/04/26}{Name change by Matthew Fluet}
|
|
% \changes{v1.44}{2017/08/11}{Now acmArticle might be empty}
|
|
% The sequence number
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\acmArticleSeq#1{\def\@acmArticleSeq{#1}}
|
|
\acmArticleSeq{\@acmArticle}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\acmYear}
|
|
% \changes{v1.17}{2016/07/10}{The default is now numerical}
|
|
% \changes{v1.31}{2017/03/04}{The default now is the current year
|
|
% (Matteo Riondato)}
|
|
% The current year
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\acmYear#1{\def\@acmYear{#1}}
|
|
\acmYear{\the\year}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\acmMonth}
|
|
% \changes{v1.17}{2016/07/09}{The default must be numerical. Closes \#50.}
|
|
% \changes{v1.31}{2017/03/04}{The default now is the current month
|
|
% (Matteo Riondato)}
|
|
% The current month
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\acmMonth#1{\def\@acmMonth{#1}}
|
|
\acmMonth{\the\month}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@acmPubDate}
|
|
% The publication date
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@acmPubDate{\ifcase\@acmMonth\or
|
|
January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or
|
|
July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or
|
|
December\fi~\@acmYear}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\acmPrice}
|
|
% The price
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\acmPrice#1{\def\@acmPrice{#1}}
|
|
\acmPrice{15.00}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\acmSubmissionID}
|
|
% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/29}{Added macro}
|
|
% The submission ID
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\acmSubmissionID#1{\def\@acmSubmissionID{#1}}
|
|
\acmSubmissionID{}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\acmISBN}
|
|
% \changes{v1.04}{2016/04/26}{Name change by Matthew Fluet}
|
|
% The book ISBN
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\acmISBN#1{\def\@acmISBN{#1}}
|
|
\acmISBN{978-x-xxxx-xxxx-x/YY/MM}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\acmDOI}
|
|
% \changes{v1.04}{2016/04/26}{Name change by Matthew Fluet}
|
|
% The paper DOI
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\acmDOI#1{\def\@acmDOI{#1}}
|
|
\acmDOI{10.1145/nnnnnnn.nnnnnnn}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\if@ACM@badge}
|
|
% \changes{v1.06}{2016/05/01}{Added macro}
|
|
% Whether to print a badge. Note that either a left or right badge
|
|
% triggers it:
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\newif\if@ACM@badge
|
|
\@ACM@badgefalse
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@ACM@badge@width}
|
|
% \changes{v1.06}{2016/05/01}{Added macro}
|
|
% The width of the badge
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\newlength\@ACM@badge@width
|
|
\setlength\@ACM@badge@width{5pc}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@ACM@title@width}
|
|
% \changes{v1.06}{2016/05/01}{Added macro}
|
|
% The width of the badge
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\newlength\@ACM@title@width
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@ACM@badge@skip}
|
|
% \changes{v1.06}{2016/05/01}{Added macro}
|
|
% The space between the badge and the title
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\newlength\@ACM@badge@skip
|
|
\setlength\@ACM@badge@skip{1pc}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\acmBadgeR}
|
|
% \changes{v1.06}{2016/05/01}{Added macro}
|
|
% Setting the right badge
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\newcommand\acmBadgeR[2][]{\@ACM@badgetrue
|
|
\def\@acmBadgeR@url{#1}%
|
|
\def\@acmBadgeR@image{#2}}
|
|
\def\@acmBadgeR@url{}
|
|
\def\@acmBadgeR@image{}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\acmBadgeL}
|
|
% \changes{v1.06}{2016/05/01}{Added macro}
|
|
% Setting the left badge
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\newcommand\acmBadgeL[2][]{\@ACM@badgetrue
|
|
\def\@acmBadgeL@url{#1}%
|
|
\def\@acmBadgeL@image{#2}}
|
|
\def\@acmBadgeL@url{}
|
|
\def\@acmBadgeL@image{}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\startPage}
|
|
% The start page of the paper
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\startPage#1{\def\@startPage{#1}}
|
|
\startPage{}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\terms}
|
|
% \changes{v1.34}{2017/04/09}{The \cs{terms} command now just produces
|
|
% a warning}
|
|
% Terms are obsolete. We use CCS now.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\terms#1{\ClassWarning{\@classname}{The command \string\terms{} is
|
|
obsolete. I am going to ignore it}}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\keywords}
|
|
% Keywords are mostly obsolete. We use CCS now. Still it makes
|
|
% sense to keep them for compatibility.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\keywords#1{\def\@keywords{#1}}
|
|
\keywords{}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{abstract}
|
|
% The |amsart| package puts |abstract| in a box. Since we do not
|
|
% know whether we will use two-column mode, we prefer to save the text
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\renewenvironment{abstract}{\Collect@Body\@saveabstract}{}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@saveabstract}
|
|
% And saving the abstract
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\long\def\@saveabstract#1{\long\gdef\@abstract{#1}}
|
|
\@saveabstract{}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@lempty}
|
|
% The long version of \cs{@empty} (to compare with \cs{@abstract})
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\long\def\@lempty{}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\if@ACM@printccs}
|
|
% \changes{v1.27}{2016/12/29}{Typo corrected}
|
|
% Whether to print CCS
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\define@boolkey+{@ACM@topmatter@}[@ACM@]{printccs}[true]{%
|
|
\if@ACM@printccs
|
|
\ClassInfo{\@classname}{Printing CCS}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\ClassInfo{\@classname}{Suppressing CCS}%
|
|
\fi}{\ClassError{\@classname}{The option printccs can be either true or false}}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\if@ACM@printacmref}
|
|
% \changes{v1.17}{2016/07/10}{Renamed from \cs{if@ACM@printbib}}
|
|
% Whether to print the ACM bibstrip
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\define@boolkey+{@ACM@topmatter@}[@ACM@]{printacmref}[true]{%
|
|
\if@ACM@printacmref
|
|
\ClassInfo{\@classname}{Printing bibformat}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\ClassInfo{\@classname}{Suppressing bibformat}%
|
|
\fi}{\ClassError{\@classname}{The option printacmref can be either true or false}}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\if@ACM@printfolios}
|
|
% \changes{v1.13}{2016/06/06}{Added macro}
|
|
% Whether to print folios
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\define@boolkey+{@ACM@topmatter@}[@ACM@]{printfolios}[true]{%
|
|
\if@ACM@printfolios
|
|
\ClassInfo{\@classname}{Printing folios}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\ClassInfo{\@classname}{Suppressing folios}%
|
|
\fi}{\ClassError{\@classname}{The option printfolios can be either true or false}}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@ACM@authorsperrow}
|
|
% \changes{v1.36}{2017/05/13}{Added macro}
|
|
% The number of authors per row. 0 means use the default algorithm.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\define@cmdkey{@ACM@topmatter@}[@ACM@]{authorsperrow}[0]{%
|
|
\IfInteger{#1}{\ClassInfo{\@classname}{Setting authorsperrow to
|
|
#1}}{\ClassWarning{\@classname}{The parameter authorsperrow must be
|
|
numerical. Ignoring the input #1}\gdef\@ACM@authorsperrow{0}}}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\settopmatter}
|
|
% The usual syntactic sugar
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\settopmatter#1{\setkeys{@ACM@topmatter@}{#1}}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \changes{v1.13}{2016/06/06}{Print bibliographic information by
|
|
% default for the proceedings}
|
|
% Now the settings
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\settopmatter{printccs=true, printacmref=true}
|
|
\if@ACM@manuscript
|
|
\settopmatter{printfolios=true}
|
|
\else
|
|
\if@ACM@journal
|
|
\settopmatter{printfolios=true}
|
|
\else
|
|
\settopmatter{printfolios=false}
|
|
\fi
|
|
\fi
|
|
\settopmatter{authorsperrow=0}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@received}
|
|
% The container for the paper history
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@received{}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\received}
|
|
% The \cs{received} command
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\newcommand\received[2][]{\def\@tempa{#1}%
|
|
\ifx\@tempa\@empty
|
|
\ifx\@received\@empty
|
|
\gdef\@received{Received #2}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\g@addto@macro{\@received}{; revised #2}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\else
|
|
\ifx\@received\@empty
|
|
\gdef\@received{#1 #2}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\g@addto@macro{\@received}{; #1 #2}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\fi}
|
|
\AtEndDocument{%
|
|
\ifx\@received\@empty\else
|
|
\par\bigskip\noindent\small\normalfont\@received\par
|
|
\fi}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
%\subsection{Concepts system}
|
|
%\label{sec:concepts}
|
|
%
|
|
% We exclude |CCSXML| stuff generated by the ACM system:
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\RequirePackage{comment}
|
|
\excludecomment{CCSXML}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@concepts}
|
|
% This is the storage macro for concepts
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\let\@concepts\@empty
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\ccsdesc}
|
|
% \changes{v1.40}{2017/05/27}{Now we can parse |Significance~General| nodes}
|
|
% The first argument is the significance, the second is the
|
|
% concept(s)
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\newcommand\ccsdesc[2][100]{%
|
|
\ccsdesc@parse#1~#2~~\ccsdesc@parse@end}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\ccsdesc@parse}
|
|
% \changes{v1.28}{2017/01/04}{Change from \cs{to} to
|
|
% \cs{textrightarrow} (Matteo Riondato)}
|
|
% \changes{v1.29}{2017/01/22}{Add spacing after bullet and around
|
|
% rightarrow; semicolon separators no longer in bold/italic (John Wickerson)}
|
|
% \changes{v1.40}{2017/05/27}{Now we can parse |Significance~General| nodes}
|
|
% The parser of the expression |Significance~General~Specific| (we need
|
|
% |textcomp| for |\textrightarrow|). Note that |Specific| can be empty!
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\RequirePackage{textcomp}
|
|
\def\ccsdesc@parse#1~#2~#3~{%
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname CCS@General@#2\endcsname\relax
|
|
\expandafter\gdef\csname CCS@General@#2\endcsname{\textbullet\
|
|
\textbf{#2}}%
|
|
\expandafter\gdef\csname CCS@Punctuation@#2\endcsname{; }%
|
|
\expandafter\gdef\csname CCS@Specific@#2\endcsname{}%
|
|
\g@addto@macro{\@concepts}{\csname CCS@General@#2\endcsname
|
|
\csname CCS@Punctuation@#2\endcsname
|
|
\csname CCS@Specific@#2\endcsname}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\ifx#3\relax\relax\else
|
|
\expandafter\gdef\csname CCS@Punctuation@#2\endcsname{
|
|
\textrightarrow\ }%
|
|
\expandafter\g@addto@macro\expandafter{\csname CCS@Specific@#2\endcsname}{%
|
|
\ifnum#1>499\textbf{#3}; \else
|
|
\ifnum#1>299\textit{#3}; \else
|
|
#3; \fi\fi}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\ccsdesc@parse@finish}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\ccdesc@parse@finish}
|
|
% \changes{v1.40}{2017/05/27}{Added macro}
|
|
% Gobble everything to |\ccsdesc@parse@end|
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\ccsdesc@parse@finish#1\ccsdesc@parse@end{}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
%\subsection{Copyright system}
|
|
%\label{sec:copyright}
|
|
%
|
|
% This is from |acmcopyright.sty|
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\if@printcopyright}
|
|
% Whether to print a copyright symbol
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\newif\if@printcopyright
|
|
\@printcopyrighttrue
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\if@printpermission}
|
|
% Whether to print the permission block
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\newif\if@printpermission
|
|
\@printpermissiontrue
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\if@acmowned}
|
|
% Whether the ACM owns the rights to the paper
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\newif\if@acmowned
|
|
\@acmownedtrue
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \changes{v1.10}{2016/05/22}{Changes of `licensedothergov' wording}
|
|
% \changes{v1.35}{2017/04/22}{If the copyright is set to usgov or
|
|
% rigtsretained, the price is suppressed}
|
|
% Keys:
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\define@choicekey*{ACM@}{acmcopyrightmode}[%
|
|
\acm@copyrightinput\acm@copyrightmode]{none,%
|
|
acmcopyright,acmlicensed,rightsretained,%
|
|
usgov,usgovmixed,cagov,cagovmixed,licensedusgovmixed,%
|
|
licensedcagov,licensedcagovmixed,othergov,licensedothergov,%
|
|
iw3c2w3,iw3c2w3g}{%
|
|
\@printpermissiontrue
|
|
\@printcopyrighttrue
|
|
\@acmownedtrue
|
|
\ifnum\acm@copyrightmode=0\relax % none
|
|
\@printpermissionfalse
|
|
\@printcopyrightfalse
|
|
\@acmownedfalse
|
|
\fi
|
|
\ifnum\acm@copyrightmode=2\relax % acmlicensed
|
|
\@acmownedfalse
|
|
\fi
|
|
\ifnum\acm@copyrightmode=3\relax % rightsretained
|
|
\@acmownedfalse
|
|
\acmPrice{}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\ifnum\acm@copyrightmode=4\relax % usgov
|
|
\@printpermissiontrue
|
|
\@printcopyrightfalse
|
|
\@acmownedfalse
|
|
\acmPrice{}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\ifnum\acm@copyrightmode=6\relax % cagov
|
|
\@acmownedfalse
|
|
\fi
|
|
\ifnum\acm@copyrightmode=8\relax % licensedusgovmixed
|
|
\@acmownedfalse
|
|
\fi
|
|
\ifnum\acm@copyrightmode=9\relax % licensedcagov
|
|
\@acmownedfalse
|
|
\fi
|
|
\ifnum\acm@copyrightmode=10\relax % licensedcagovmixed
|
|
\@acmownedfalse
|
|
\fi
|
|
\ifnum\acm@copyrightmode=11\relax % othergov
|
|
\@acmownedtrue
|
|
\fi
|
|
\ifnum\acm@copyrightmode=12\relax % licensedothergov
|
|
\@acmownedfalse
|
|
\fi
|
|
\ifnum\acm@copyrightmode=13\relax % iw3c2w3
|
|
\@acmownedfalse
|
|
\fi
|
|
\ifnum\acm@copyrightmode=14\relax % iw3c2w3g
|
|
\@acmownedfalse
|
|
\fi}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\setcopyright}
|
|
% This is the syntactic sugar around setting keys.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\setcopyright#1{\setkeys{ACM@}{acmcopyrightmode=#1}}
|
|
\setcopyright{acmcopyright}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@copyrightowner}
|
|
% \changes{v1.40}{2017/06/16}{Added new copyright version: licensedcagov}
|
|
% Here is the owner of the copyright
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@copyrightowner{%
|
|
\ifcase\acm@copyrightmode\relax % none
|
|
\or % acmcopyright
|
|
Association for Computing Machinery.
|
|
\or % acmlicensed
|
|
Copyright held by the owner/author(s). Publication rights licensed to
|
|
the Association for Computing Machinery.
|
|
\or % rightsretained
|
|
Copyright held by the owner/author(s).
|
|
\or % usgov
|
|
\or % usgovmixed
|
|
Association for Computing Machinery.
|
|
\or % cagov
|
|
Crown in Right of Canada.
|
|
\or %cagovmixed
|
|
Association for Computing Machinery.
|
|
\or %licensedusgovmixed
|
|
Copyright held by the owner/author(s). Publication rights licensed to
|
|
the Association for Computing Machinery.
|
|
\or % licensedcagov
|
|
Crown in Right of Canada. Publication rights licensed to
|
|
the Association for Computing Machinery.
|
|
\or %licensedcagovmixed
|
|
Copyright held by the owner/author(s). Publication rights licensed to
|
|
the Association for Computing Machinery.
|
|
\or % othergov
|
|
Association for Computing Machinery.
|
|
\or % licensedothergov
|
|
Copyright held by the owner/author(s). Publication rights licensed to
|
|
the Association for Computing Machinery.
|
|
\or % ic2w3www
|
|
IW3C2 (International World Wide Web Conference Committee), published
|
|
under Creative Commons CC~BY~4.0 License.
|
|
\or % ic2w3wwwgoogle
|
|
IW3C2 (International World Wide Web Conference Committee), published
|
|
under Creative Commons CC~BY-NC-ND~4.0 License.
|
|
\fi}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@formatdoi}
|
|
% \changes{v1.03}{2016/04/22}{Added macro}
|
|
% \changes{v1.32}{2017/04/07}{New doi format}
|
|
% Print a clickable DOI
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@formatdoi#1{\url{https://doi.org/#1}}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@copyrightpermission}
|
|
% \changes{v1.40}{2017/06/16}{Added new copyright version: licensedcagov}
|
|
% \changes{v1.50}{2018/02/07}{New copyright statements for iw3c2w3[g]}
|
|
% The canned permission block.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@copyrightpermission{%
|
|
\ifcase\acm@copyrightmode\relax % none
|
|
\or % acmcopyright
|
|
Permission to make digital or hard copies of all or part of this
|
|
work for personal or classroom use is granted without fee provided
|
|
that copies are not made or distributed for profit or commercial
|
|
advantage and that copies bear this notice and the full citation on
|
|
the first page. Copyrights for components of this work owned by
|
|
others than ACM must be honored. Abstracting with credit is
|
|
permitted. To copy otherwise, or republish, to post on servers or to
|
|
redistribute to lists, requires prior specific permission
|
|
and\hspace*{.5pt}/or a fee. Request permissions from
|
|
permissions@acm.org.
|
|
\or % acmlicensed
|
|
Permission to make digital or hard copies of all or part of this
|
|
work for personal or classroom use is granted without fee provided
|
|
that copies are not made or distributed for profit or commercial
|
|
advantage and that copies bear this notice and the full citation on
|
|
the first page. Copyrights for components of this work owned by
|
|
others than the author(s) must be honored. Abstracting with credit
|
|
is permitted. To copy otherwise, or republish, to post on servers
|
|
or to redistribute to lists, requires prior specific permission
|
|
and\hspace*{.5pt}/or a fee. Request permissions from
|
|
permissions@acm.org.
|
|
\or % rightsretained
|
|
Permission to make digital or hard copies of part or all of this work
|
|
for personal or classroom use is granted without fee provided that
|
|
copies are not made or distributed for profit or commercial advantage
|
|
and that copies bear this notice and the full citation on the first
|
|
page. Copyrights for third-party components of this work must be
|
|
honored. For all other uses, contact the
|
|
owner\hspace*{.5pt}/author(s).
|
|
\or % usgov
|
|
This paper is authored by an employee(s) of the United States
|
|
Government and is in the public domain. Non-exclusive copying or
|
|
redistribution is allowed, provided that the article citation is
|
|
given and the authors and agency are clearly identified as its
|
|
source.
|
|
\or % usgovmixed
|
|
ACM acknowledges that this contribution was authored or co-authored
|
|
by an employee, contractor, or affiliate of the United States government. As such,
|
|
the United States government retains a nonexclusive, royalty-free right to
|
|
publish or reproduce this article, or to allow others to do so, for
|
|
government purposes only.
|
|
\or % cagov
|
|
This article was authored by employees of the Government of Canada.
|
|
As such, the Canadian government retains all interest in the
|
|
copyright to this work and grants to ACM a nonexclusive,
|
|
royalty-free right to publish or reproduce this article, or to allow
|
|
others to do so, provided that clear attribution is given both to
|
|
the authors and the Canadian government agency employing them.
|
|
Permission to make digital or hard copies for personal or classroom
|
|
use is granted. Copies must bear this notice and the full citation
|
|
on the first page. Copyrights for components of this work owned by
|
|
others than the Canadian Government must be honored. To copy
|
|
otherwise, distribute, republish, or post, requires prior specific
|
|
permission and\hspace*{.5pt}/or a fee. Request permissions from
|
|
permissions@acm.org.
|
|
\or % cagovmixed
|
|
ACM acknowledges that this contribution was co-authored by an
|
|
affiliate of the national government of Canada. As such, the Crown
|
|
in Right of Canada retains an equal interest in the copyright.
|
|
Reprints must include clear attribution to ACM and the author's
|
|
government agency affiliation. Permission to make digital or hard
|
|
copies for personal or classroom use is granted. Copies must bear
|
|
this notice and the full citation on the first page. Copyrights for
|
|
components of this work owned by others than ACM must be honored.
|
|
To copy otherwise, distribute, republish, or post, requires prior
|
|
specific permission and\hspace*{.5pt}/or a fee. Request permissions
|
|
from permissions@acm.org.
|
|
\or % licensedusgovmixed
|
|
Publication rights licensed to ACM\@. ACM acknowledges that this
|
|
contribution was authored or co-authored by an employee, contractor
|
|
or affiliate of the United States government. As such, the
|
|
Government retains a nonexclusive, royalty-free right to publish or
|
|
reproduce this article, or to allow others to do so, for Government
|
|
purposes only.
|
|
\or % licensedcagov
|
|
This article was authored by employees of the Government of Canada.
|
|
As such, the Canadian government retains all interest in the
|
|
copyright to this work and grants to ACM a nonexclusive,
|
|
royalty-free right to publish or reproduce this article, or to allow
|
|
others to do so, provided that clear attribution is given both to
|
|
the authors and the Canadian government agency employing them.
|
|
Permission to make digital or hard copies for personal or classroom
|
|
use is granted. Copies must bear this notice and the full citation
|
|
on the first page. Copyrights for components of this work owned by
|
|
others than the Canadian Government must be honored. To copy
|
|
otherwise, distribute, republish, or post, requires prior specific
|
|
permission and\hspace*{.5pt}/or a fee. Request permissions from
|
|
permissions@acm.org.
|
|
\or % licensedcagovmixed
|
|
Publication rights licensed to ACM\@. ACM acknowledges that this
|
|
contribution was authored or co-authored by an employee, contractor
|
|
or affiliate of the national government of Canada. As such, the
|
|
Government retains a nonexclusive, royalty-free right to publish or
|
|
reproduce this article, or to allow others to do so, for Government
|
|
purposes only.
|
|
\or % othergov
|
|
ACM acknowledges that this contribution was authored or co-authored
|
|
by an employee, contractor or affiliate of a national government. As
|
|
such, the Government retains a nonexclusive, royalty-free right to
|
|
publish or reproduce this article, or to allow others to do so, for
|
|
Government purposes only.
|
|
\or % licensedothergov
|
|
Publication rights licensed to ACM\@. ACM acknowledges that this
|
|
contribution was authored or co-authored by an employee, contractor
|
|
or affiliate of a national government. As such, the Government
|
|
retains a nonexclusive, royalty-free right to publish or reproduce
|
|
this article, or to allow others to do so, for Government purposes
|
|
only.
|
|
\or % iw3c2w3
|
|
This paper is published under the Creative Commons Attribution~4.0
|
|
International (CC~BY~4.0) license. Authors reserve their rights to
|
|
disseminate the work on their personal and corporate Web sites with
|
|
the appropriate attribution.
|
|
\or % iw3c2w3g
|
|
This paper is published under the Creative Commons
|
|
Attribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivs~4.0 International
|
|
(CC~BY-NC-ND~4.0) license. Authors reserve their rights to
|
|
disseminate the work on their personal and corporate Web sites with
|
|
the appropriate attribution.
|
|
\fi}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\copyrightyear}
|
|
% By default, the copyright year is the same as \cs{acmYear}, but
|
|
% one can override this:
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\copyrightyear#1{\def\@copyrightyear{#1}}
|
|
\copyrightyear{\@acmYear}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@teaserfigures}
|
|
% The teaser figures container
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@teaserfigures{}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{teaserfigure}
|
|
% The teaser figure
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\newenvironment{teaserfigure}{\Collect@Body\@saveteaser}{}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@saveteaser}
|
|
% Saving the teaser
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\long\def\@saveteaser#1{\g@addto@macro\@teaserfigures{\@teaser{#1}}}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\thanks}
|
|
% We redefine |amsart| \cs{thanks} so the |anonymous| key works
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\renewcommand{\thanks}[1]{%
|
|
\@ifnotempty{#1}{%
|
|
\if@ACM@anonymous
|
|
\g@addto@macro\thankses{\thanks{A note}}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\g@addto@macro\thankses{\thanks{#1}}%
|
|
\fi}}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \subsection{Typesetting top matter}
|
|
% \label{sec:makefile}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\mktitle@bx}
|
|
% Some of our formats use a two-column design. Some use a one-column
|
|
% design. In all cases we use a wide title. Thus we typeset the top
|
|
% matter in a special box to be used in the construction
|
|
% \cs{@twocolumn}\oarg{box}.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\newbox\mktitle@bx
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\maketitle}
|
|
% \changes{v1.03}{2016/04/22}{Added special case of authorversion}
|
|
% \changes{v1.07}{2016/05/03}{Corrected a bug with abstract footnotes}
|
|
% \changes{v1.07}{2016/05/03}{Corrected a bug with permssion and
|
|
% footnotes order}
|
|
% \changes{v1.10}{2016/05/23}{Corrected a bug with doi in manuscript
|
|
% and author vertsion,
|
|
% \url{https://github.com/borisveytsman/acmart/issues/36}}
|
|
% \changes{v1.12}{2016/05/30}{Moved thankses to copyrightpermission box}
|
|
% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/27}{Fixed the bug with figures on top and
|
|
% bottom of the title page, thanks to David Epstein}
|
|
% \changes{v1.34}{2017/04/09}{Deleted `DOI' from doi numbers}
|
|
% \changes{v1.34}{2017/04/09}{Added date to the bibstrip in conf proceedings}
|
|
% \changes{v1.34}{2017/04/09}{The \cs{terms} command is now obsolete}
|
|
% \changes{v1.34}{2017/04/11}{Rearranged bibstrip}
|
|
% \changes{v1.44}{2017/07/30}{Empty DOI or ISBN are not printed (by
|
|
% Michael Ekstrand)}
|
|
% \changes{v1.46}{2017/08/27}{Added authors' addresses}
|
|
% \changes{v1.46}{2017/08/28}{Thankses go before authors' addresses}
|
|
% \changes{v1.48}{2017/09/23}{Added acmart and version info to
|
|
% pdfcreator tag}
|
|
% \changes{v1.48}{2017/10/14}{Suppressed empty DOI (Serguei Mokhov)}
|
|
% \changes{v1.48}{2017/11/18}{Added language and doctitle attributes
|
|
% to PDF (Andreas Reichinger)}
|
|
% The (in)famous \cs{maketitle}. Note that in |sigchi-a| mode, authors
|
|
% are \emph{not} in the title box.
|
|
%
|
|
% Another note: there is a subtle difference between author notes,
|
|
% title notes and thanks. The latter two refer to the paper itself
|
|
% and therefore belong to the copyright/permission block. By the
|
|
% way, this was the default behavior of the old ACM classes.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\maketitle{%
|
|
\if@ACM@anonymous
|
|
% Anonymize omission of \author-s
|
|
\ifnum\num@authorgroups=0\author{}\fi
|
|
\fi
|
|
\begingroup
|
|
\let\@footnotemark\@footnotemark@nolink
|
|
\let\@footnotetext\@footnotetext@nolink
|
|
\renewcommand\thefootnote{\@fnsymbol\c@footnote}%
|
|
\global\@topnum\z@ % this prevents floats from falling
|
|
% at the top of page 1
|
|
\global\@botnum\z@ % we do not want them to be on the bottom either
|
|
\hsize=\textwidth
|
|
\def\@makefnmark{\hbox{\@textsuperscript{\@thefnmark}}}%
|
|
\@mktitle\if@ACM@sigchiamode\else\@mkauthors\fi\@mkteasers
|
|
\@printtopmatter
|
|
\if@ACM@sigchiamode\@mkauthors\fi
|
|
\setcounter{footnote}{0}%
|
|
\def\@makefnmark{\hbox{\@textsuperscript{\normalfont\@thefnmark}}}%
|
|
\@titlenotes
|
|
\@subtitlenotes
|
|
\@authornotes
|
|
\let\@makefnmark\relax
|
|
\let\@thefnmark\relax
|
|
\let\@makefntext\noindent
|
|
\ifx\@empty\thankses\else
|
|
\footnotetextauthorsaddresses{%
|
|
\def\par{\let\par\@par}\parindent\z@\@setthanks}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\ifx\@empty\@authorsaddresses\else
|
|
\if@ACM@anonymous\else
|
|
\if@ACM@journal
|
|
\footnotetextauthorsaddresses{%
|
|
\def\par{\let\par\@par}\parindent\z@\@setauthorsaddresses}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\fi
|
|
\fi
|
|
\footnotetextcopyrightpermission{%
|
|
\if@ACM@authordraft
|
|
\raisebox{-2ex}[\z@][\z@]{\makebox[0pt][l]{\large\bfseries
|
|
Unpublished working draft. Not for distribution.}}%
|
|
\color[gray]{0.9}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\parindent\z@\parskip0.1\baselineskip
|
|
\if@ACM@authorversion\else
|
|
\if@printpermission\@copyrightpermission\par\fi
|
|
\fi
|
|
\if@ACM@manuscript\else
|
|
\if@ACM@journal\else % Print the conference information
|
|
{\itshape \acmConference@shortname, \acmConference@date, \acmConference@venue}\par
|
|
\fi
|
|
\fi
|
|
\if@printcopyright
|
|
\copyright\ \@copyrightyear\ \@copyrightowner\\
|
|
\else
|
|
\@copyrightyear.\
|
|
\fi
|
|
\if@ACM@manuscript
|
|
Manuscript submitted to ACM\\
|
|
\else
|
|
\if@ACM@authorversion
|
|
This is the author's version of the work. It is posted here for
|
|
your personal use. Not for redistribution. The definitive Version
|
|
of Record was published in
|
|
\if@ACM@journal
|
|
\emph{\@journalName}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\emph{\@acmBooktitle}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\ifx\@acmDOI\@empty
|
|
.
|
|
\else
|
|
, \@formatdoi{\@acmDOI}.
|
|
\fi\\
|
|
\else
|
|
\if@ACM@journal
|
|
\@permissionCodeOne/\@acmYear/\@acmMonth-ART\@acmArticle
|
|
\ifx\@acmPrice\@empty\else\ \$\@acmPrice\fi\\
|
|
\@formatdoi{\@acmDOI}%
|
|
\else % Conference
|
|
\ifx\@acmISBN\@empty\else ACM~ISBN~\@acmISBN
|
|
\ifx\@acmPrice\@empty.\else\dots\$\@acmPrice\fi\\\fi
|
|
\ifx\@acmDOI\@empty\else\@formatdoi{\@acmDOI}\fi%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\fi
|
|
\fi}
|
|
\endgroup
|
|
\setcounter{footnote}{0}%
|
|
\@mkabstract
|
|
\if@ACM@printccs
|
|
\ifx\@concepts\@empty\else\bgroup
|
|
{\@specialsection{CCS Concepts}%
|
|
\@concepts\par}\egroup
|
|
\fi
|
|
\fi
|
|
\ifx\@keywords\@empty\else\bgroup
|
|
{\if@ACM@journal
|
|
\@specialsection{Additional Key Words and Phrases}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\@specialsection{Keywords}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\@keywords}\par\egroup
|
|
\fi
|
|
\andify\authors
|
|
\andify\shortauthors
|
|
\global\let\authors=\authors
|
|
\global\let\shortauthors=\shortauthors
|
|
\if@ACM@printacmref
|
|
\@mkbibcitation
|
|
\fi
|
|
\hypersetup{%
|
|
pdflang={English},
|
|
pdfdisplaydoctitle,
|
|
pdfauthor={\authors},
|
|
pdftitle={\@title},
|
|
pdfsubject={\@concepts},
|
|
pdfkeywords={\@keywords},
|
|
pdfcreator={LaTeX with acmart
|
|
\csname ver@acmart.cls\endcsname\space
|
|
and hyperref
|
|
\csname ver@hyperref.sty\endcsname}}%
|
|
\@printendtopmatter
|
|
\@afterindentfalse
|
|
\@afterheading
|
|
}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@specialsection}
|
|
% This macro starts sections for proceedings and uses \cs{small} for journals
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@specialsection#1{%
|
|
\ifcase\ACM@format@nr
|
|
\relax % manuscript
|
|
\par\medskip\small\noindent#1: %
|
|
\or % acmsmall
|
|
\par\medskip\small\noindent#1: %
|
|
\or % acmlarge
|
|
\par\medskip\small\noindent#1: %
|
|
\or % acmtog
|
|
\par\medskip\small\noindent#1: %
|
|
\or % sigconf
|
|
\section*{#1}%
|
|
\or % siggraph
|
|
\section*{#1}%
|
|
\or % sigplan
|
|
\paragraph*{#1}%
|
|
\or % sigchi
|
|
\section*{#1}%
|
|
\or % sigchi-a
|
|
\section*{#1}%
|
|
\fi}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@printtopmatter}
|
|
% \changes{v1.06}{2016/05/01}{Added processing badges}
|
|
% \changes{v1.46}{2017/08/29}{Deleted rule}
|
|
% The printing of top matter starts a new page and uses the given
|
|
% title box. Note that for |sigchi-a| we print badges here rather
|
|
% than in \cs{mktitle} since we want them in the margins.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@printtopmatter{%
|
|
\ifx\@startPage\@empty
|
|
\gdef\@startPage{1}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\setcounter{page}{\@startPage}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\thispagestyle{firstpagestyle}%
|
|
\noindent
|
|
\ifcase\ACM@format@nr
|
|
\relax % manuscript
|
|
\box\mktitle@bx\par
|
|
\or % acmsmall
|
|
\box\mktitle@bx\par
|
|
\or % acmlarge
|
|
\box\mktitle@bx\par
|
|
\or % acmtog
|
|
\twocolumn[\box\mktitle@bx]%
|
|
\or % sigconf
|
|
\twocolumn[\box\mktitle@bx]%
|
|
\or % siggraph
|
|
\twocolumn[\box\mktitle@bx]%
|
|
\or % sigplan
|
|
\twocolumn[\box\mktitle@bx]%
|
|
\or % sigchi
|
|
\twocolumn[\box\mktitle@bx]%
|
|
\or % sigchi-a
|
|
\par\box\mktitle@bx\par\bigskip
|
|
\if@ACM@badge
|
|
\marginpar{\noindent
|
|
\ifx\@acmBadgeL@image\@empty\else
|
|
\href{\@acmBadgeL@url}{%
|
|
\includegraphics[width=\@ACM@badge@width]{\@acmBadgeL@image}}%
|
|
\hskip\@ACM@badge@skip
|
|
\fi
|
|
\ifx\@acmBadgeR@image\@empty\else
|
|
\href{\@acmBadgeR@url}{%
|
|
\includegraphics[width=\@ACM@badge@width]{\@acmBadgeR@image}}%
|
|
\fi}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\fi
|
|
}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@mktitle}
|
|
% The title of the article
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@mktitle{%
|
|
\ifcase\ACM@format@nr
|
|
\relax % manuscript
|
|
\@mktitle@i
|
|
\or % acmsmall
|
|
\@mktitle@i
|
|
\or % acmlarge
|
|
\@mktitle@i
|
|
\or % acmtog
|
|
\@mktitle@i
|
|
\or % sigconf
|
|
\@mktitle@iii
|
|
\or % siggraph
|
|
\@mktitle@iii
|
|
\or % sigplan
|
|
\@mktitle@iii
|
|
\or % sigchi
|
|
\@mktitle@iii
|
|
\or % sigchi-a
|
|
\@mktitle@iv
|
|
\fi
|
|
}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@titlefont}
|
|
% \changes{v1.06}{2016/05/01}{Added macro}
|
|
% \changes{v1.45}{2017/08/15}{Switched \cs{bfeseries}\cs{sffamily} to
|
|
% \cs{sffamily}\cs{bfseries}}
|
|
% The font to typeset the title
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@titlefont{%
|
|
\ifcase\ACM@format@nr
|
|
\relax % manuscript
|
|
\LARGE\sffamily\bfseries
|
|
\or % acmsmall
|
|
\LARGE\sffamily\bfseries
|
|
\or % acmlarge
|
|
\LARGE\sffamily\bfseries
|
|
\or % acmtog
|
|
\Huge\sffamily
|
|
\or % sigconf
|
|
\Huge\sffamily\bfseries
|
|
\or % siggraph
|
|
\Huge\sffamily\bfseries
|
|
\or % sigplan
|
|
\Huge\bfseries
|
|
\or % sigchi
|
|
\Huge\sffamily\bfseries
|
|
\or % sigchi-a
|
|
\Huge\bfseries
|
|
\fi}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@subtitlefont}
|
|
% \changes{v1.06}{2016/05/01}{Added macro}
|
|
% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/12}{Added \cs{normalsize}}
|
|
% The font to typeset the subtitle
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@subtitlefont{\normalsize
|
|
\ifcase\ACM@format@nr
|
|
\relax % manuscript
|
|
\mdseries
|
|
\or % acmsmall
|
|
\mdseries
|
|
\or % acmlarge
|
|
\mdseries
|
|
\or % acmtog
|
|
\LARGE
|
|
\or % sigconf
|
|
\LARGE\mdseries
|
|
\or % siggraph
|
|
\LARGE\mdseries
|
|
\or % sigplan
|
|
\LARGE\mdseries
|
|
\or % sigchi
|
|
\LARGE\mdseries
|
|
\or % sigchi-a
|
|
\mdseries
|
|
\fi}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@mktitle@i}
|
|
% \changes{v1.06}{2016/05/01}{Made generic}
|
|
% \changes{v1.06}{2016/05/01}{Added processing badges}
|
|
% The version of \cs{mktitle} for most journals
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@mktitle@i{\hsize=\textwidth
|
|
\@ACM@title@width=\hsize
|
|
\ifx\@acmBadgeL@image\@empty\else
|
|
\advance\@ACM@title@width by -\@ACM@badge@width
|
|
\advance\@ACM@title@width by -\@ACM@badge@skip
|
|
\fi
|
|
\ifx\@acmBadgeR@image\@empty\else
|
|
\advance\@ACM@title@width by -\@ACM@badge@width
|
|
\advance\@ACM@title@width by -\@ACM@badge@skip
|
|
\fi
|
|
\setbox\mktitle@bx=\vbox{\noindent\@titlefont
|
|
\ifx\@acmBadgeL@image\@empty\else
|
|
\raisebox{-.5\baselineskip}[\z@][\z@]{\href{\@acmBadgeL@url}{%
|
|
\includegraphics[width=\@ACM@badge@width]{\@acmBadgeL@image}}}%
|
|
\hskip\@ACM@badge@skip
|
|
\fi
|
|
\parbox[t]{\@ACM@title@width}{\raggedright
|
|
\@titlefont\noindent
|
|
\@title
|
|
\ifx\@subtitle\@empty\else
|
|
\par\noindent{\@subtitlefont\@subtitle}
|
|
\fi}%
|
|
\ifx\@acmBadgeR@image\@empty\else
|
|
\hskip\@ACM@badge@skip
|
|
\raisebox{-.5\baselineskip}[\z@][\z@]{\href{\@acmBadgeR@url}{%
|
|
\includegraphics[width=\@ACM@badge@width]{\@acmBadgeR@image}}}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\par\bigskip}}%
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@mktitle@ii}
|
|
% \changes{v1.06}{2016/05/01}{Now this macro is obsolete}
|
|
% The version of \cs{mktitle} for TOG. Since v1.06, this is subsumed by
|
|
% the \cs{mktitle@i} macro
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@mktitle@iii}
|
|
% \changes{v1.06}{2016/05/01}{Made more generic}
|
|
% \changes{v1.06}{2016/05/01}{Added processing badges}
|
|
% The version of \cs{@mktitle} for SIG proceedings. Note that since
|
|
% the title is centered, we leave space for the left badge even if
|
|
% only the right badge is defined.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@mktitle@iii{\hsize=\textwidth
|
|
\setbox\mktitle@bx=\vbox{\@titlefont\centering
|
|
\@ACM@title@width=\hsize
|
|
\if@ACM@badge
|
|
\advance\@ACM@title@width by -2\@ACM@badge@width
|
|
\advance\@ACM@title@width by -2\@ACM@badge@skip
|
|
\parbox[b]{\@ACM@badge@width}{\strut
|
|
\ifx\@acmBadgeL@image\@empty\else
|
|
\raisebox{-.5\baselineskip}[\z@][\z@]{\href{\@acmBadgeL@url}{%
|
|
\includegraphics[width=\@ACM@badge@width]{\@acmBadgeL@image}}}%
|
|
\fi}%
|
|
\hskip\@ACM@badge@skip
|
|
\fi
|
|
\parbox[t]{\@ACM@title@width}{\centering\@titlefont
|
|
\@title
|
|
\ifx\@subtitle\@empty\else
|
|
\par\noindent{\@subtitlefont\@subtitle}
|
|
\fi
|
|
}%
|
|
\if@ACM@badge
|
|
\hskip\@ACM@badge@skip
|
|
\parbox[b]{\@ACM@badge@width}{\strut
|
|
\ifx\@acmBadgeR@image\@empty\else
|
|
\raisebox{-.5\baselineskip}[\z@][\z@]{\href{\@acmBadgeR@url}{%
|
|
\includegraphics[width=\@ACM@badge@width]{\@acmBadgeR@image}}}%
|
|
\fi}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\par\bigskip}}%
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@mktitle@iv}
|
|
% \changes{v1.06}{2016/05/01}{Made more generic}
|
|
% The version of \cs{@mktitle} for |sigchi-a|
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@mktitle@iv{\hsize=\textwidth
|
|
\setbox\mktitle@bx=\vbox{\raggedright\leftskip5pc\@titlefont
|
|
\noindent\leavevmode\leaders\hrule height 2pt\hfill\kern0pt\par
|
|
\noindent\@title
|
|
\ifx\@subtitle\@empty\else
|
|
\par\noindent\@subtitlefont\@subtitle
|
|
\fi
|
|
\par\bigskip}}%
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@ACM@addtoaddress}
|
|
% \changes{v1.15}{2016/07/03}{Added macro}
|
|
% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/28}{Added obeypunctuation code}
|
|
% This macro adds an item to the address using the following rules:
|
|
% \begin{enumerate}
|
|
% \item If we start a paragraph, add the item
|
|
% \item Otherwise, add a comma and the item
|
|
% \item However, the comma is deleted if it is at the end of a
|
|
% line. We use the magic \cs{cleaders} trick for this.
|
|
% \end{enumerate}
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\newbox\@ACM@commabox
|
|
\def\@ACM@addtoaddress#1{%
|
|
\ifvmode\else
|
|
\if@ACM@affiliation@obeypunctuation\else
|
|
\setbox\@ACM@commabox=\hbox{, }%
|
|
\unskip\cleaders\copy\@ACM@commabox\hskip\wd\@ACM@commabox
|
|
\fi\fi
|
|
#1}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\institution}
|
|
% \changes{v1.15}{2016/07/03}{Added macro}
|
|
% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/28}{Added obeypunctuation code}
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\position}
|
|
% \changes{v1.15}{2016/07/03}{Added macro}
|
|
% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/28}{Added obeypunctuation code}
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\department}
|
|
% \changes{v1.15}{2016/07/03}{Added macro}
|
|
% \changes{v1.30}{2017/02/10}{Added optional parameter}
|
|
% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/28}{Added obeypunctuation code}
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\streetaddress}
|
|
% \changes{v1.15}{2016/07/03}{Added macro}
|
|
% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/28}{Added obeypunctuation code}
|
|
% \changes{v1.40}{2017/06/15}{We now do not print this even in SIG}
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\city}
|
|
% \changes{v1.15}{2016/07/03}{Added macro}
|
|
% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/28}{Added obeypunctuation code}
|
|
% \changes{v1.40}{2017/06/15}{We now do not print this even in SIG}
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\state}
|
|
% \changes{v1.15}{2016/07/03}{Added macro}
|
|
% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/28}{Added obeypunctuation code}
|
|
% \changes{v1.40}{2017/06/15}{We now do not print this even in SIG}
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\postcode}
|
|
% \changes{v1.15}{2016/07/03}{Added macro}
|
|
% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/28}{Added obeypunctuation code}
|
|
% \changes{v1.40}{2017/06/15}{We now do not print this even in SIG}
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\country}
|
|
% \changes{v1.15}{2016/07/03}{Added macro}
|
|
% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/28}{Added obeypunctuation code}
|
|
% \changes{v1.40}{2017/05/27}{Fixed bugs with extra spaces}
|
|
% \changes{v1.43}{2017/07/11}{Added comma before country for journals}
|
|
% \changes{v1.46}{2017/08/30}{Corrected spacing for institution}
|
|
% Theoretically we can define the macros for \cs{affiliation} inside
|
|
% the \cs{@mkauthors}-style commands. However, this would lead to a
|
|
% strange error if an author uses them outside \cs{affiliation}. Of
|
|
% course we can make them produce an error message, but\ldots
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\streetaddress#1{\unskip\ignorespaces}
|
|
\def\postcode#1{\unskip\ignorespaces}
|
|
\if@ACM@journal
|
|
\def\position#1{\unskip\ignorespaces}
|
|
\def\institution#1{\unskip~#1\ignorespaces}
|
|
\def\city#1{\unskip\ignorespaces}
|
|
\def\state#1{\unskip\ignorespaces}
|
|
\newcommand\department[2][0]{\unskip\ignorespaces}
|
|
\def\country#1{\if@ACM@affiliation@obeypunctuation\else, \fi#1\ignorespaces}
|
|
\else
|
|
\def\position#1{\if@ACM@affiliation@obeypunctuation#1\else#1\par\fi}%
|
|
\def\institution#1{\if@ACM@affiliation@obeypunctuation#1\else#1\par\fi}%
|
|
\newcommand\department[2][0]{\if@ACM@affiliation@obeypunctuation
|
|
#2\else#2\par\fi}%
|
|
% \def\streetaddress#1{\if@ACM@affiliation@obeypunctuation#1\else#1\par\fi}%
|
|
\let\city\@ACM@addtoaddress
|
|
\let\state\@ACM@addtoaddress
|
|
% \def\postcode#1{\if@ACM@affiliation@obeypunctuation#1\else\unskip\space#1\fi}%
|
|
\let\country\@ACM@addtoaddress
|
|
\fi
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@mkauthors}
|
|
% \changes{v1.17}{2016/07/09}{TOG now uses the same authors block as
|
|
% other journals}
|
|
% Typesetting the authors
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@mkauthors{\begingroup
|
|
\hsize=\textwidth
|
|
\ifcase\ACM@format@nr
|
|
\relax % manuscript
|
|
\@mkauthors@i
|
|
\or % acmsmall
|
|
\@mkauthors@i
|
|
\or % acmlarge
|
|
\@mkauthors@i
|
|
\or % acmtog
|
|
\@mkauthors@i
|
|
\or % sigconf
|
|
\@mkauthors@iii
|
|
\or % siggraph
|
|
\@mkauthors@iii
|
|
\or % sigplan
|
|
\@mkauthors@iii
|
|
\or % sigchi
|
|
\@mkauthors@iii
|
|
\or % sigchi-a
|
|
\@mkauthors@iv
|
|
\fi
|
|
\endgroup
|
|
}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@authorfont}
|
|
% Somehow different conferences use different fonts for author
|
|
% names. Why?
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@authorfont{\Large\sffamily}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@affiliationfont}
|
|
% Font for affiliations
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@affiliationfont{\normalsize\normalfont}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \changes{v1.13}{2016/06/06}{Font adjustments for acmsmall}
|
|
% Adjusting fonts for different formats
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\ifcase\ACM@format@nr
|
|
\relax % manuscript
|
|
\or % acmsmall
|
|
\def\@authorfont{\large\sffamily}
|
|
\def\@affiliationfont{\small\normalfont}
|
|
\or % acmlarge
|
|
\or % acmtog
|
|
\def\@authorfont{\LARGE\sffamily}
|
|
\def\@affiliationfont{\large}
|
|
\or % sigconf
|
|
\def\@authorfont{\LARGE}
|
|
\def\@affiliationfont{\large}
|
|
\or % siggraph
|
|
\def\@authorfont{\normalsize\normalfont}
|
|
\def\@affiliationfont{\normalsize\normalfont}
|
|
\or % sigplan
|
|
\def\@authorfont{\Large\normalfont}
|
|
\def\@affiliationfont{\normalsize\normalfont}
|
|
\or % sigchi
|
|
\def\@authorfont{\bfseries}
|
|
\def\@affiliationfont{\mdseries}
|
|
\or % sigchi-a
|
|
\def\@authorfont{\bfseries}
|
|
\def\@affiliationfont{\mdseries}
|
|
\fi
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@typeset@author@line}
|
|
% \changes{v1.18}{2016/07/12}{Added macro}
|
|
% At this point we have \cs{@currentauthors} and
|
|
% \cs{@currentaffiliations}. We typeset them in the journal style
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@typeset@author@line{%
|
|
\andify\@currentauthors\par\noindent
|
|
\@currentauthors\def\@currentauthors{}%
|
|
\ifx\@currentaffiliations\@empty\else
|
|
\andify\@currentaffiliations
|
|
\unskip, {\@currentaffiliations}\par
|
|
\fi
|
|
\def\@currentaffiliations{}}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@mkauthors@i}
|
|
% \changes{v1.18}{2016/07/12}{Now we andify affiliations}
|
|
% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/28}{Added obeypunctuation code}
|
|
% \changes{v1.40}{2017/06/04}{Switched to MakeTextUppercase}
|
|
% This version is used in most journal formats. Note that \cs{and} between
|
|
% authors with the same affiliation becomes \verb*| and |:
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@mkauthors@i{%
|
|
\def\@currentauthors{}%
|
|
\def\@currentaffiliations{}%
|
|
\global\let\and\@typeset@author@line
|
|
\def\@author##1{%
|
|
\ifx\@currentauthors\@empty
|
|
\gdef\@currentauthors{\@authorfont\MakeTextUppercase{##1}}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\g@addto@macro{\@currentauthors}{\and\MakeTextUppercase{##1}}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\gdef\and{}}%
|
|
\def\email##1##2{}%
|
|
\def\affiliation##1##2{%
|
|
\def\@tempa{##2}\ifx\@tempa\@empty\else
|
|
\ifx\@currentaffiliations\@empty
|
|
\gdef\@currentaffiliations{%
|
|
\setkeys{@ACM@affiliation@}{obeypunctuation=false}%
|
|
\setkeys{@ACM@affiliation@}{##1}%
|
|
\@affiliationfont##2}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\g@addto@macro{\@currentaffiliations}{\and
|
|
\setkeys{@ACM@affiliation@}{obeypunctuation=false}%
|
|
\setkeys{@ACM@affiliation@}{##1}##2}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\fi
|
|
\global\let\and\@typeset@author@line}%
|
|
\global\setbox\mktitle@bx=\vbox{\noindent\box\mktitle@bx\par\medskip
|
|
\noindent\addresses\@typeset@author@line
|
|
\par\medskip}%
|
|
}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@mkauthors@ii}
|
|
% \changes{v1.17}{2016/07/09}{Deleted}
|
|
% The \cs{@mkauthors@ii} command was the version used in |acmtog|.
|
|
% It is no longer necessary.
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\author@bx}
|
|
% The box to put an individual author in
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\newbox\author@bx
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\author@bx@wd}
|
|
% The width of the author box
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\newdimen\author@bx@wd
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\author@bx@sep}
|
|
% The separation between author boxes
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\newskip\author@bx@sep
|
|
\author@bx@sep=1pc\relax
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@typeset@author@bx}
|
|
% \changes{v1.15}{2016/07/04}{Moved to separate macro}
|
|
% Typesetting the box with authors. Note that in |sigchi-a| the box
|
|
% is not centered.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@typeset@author@bx{\bgroup\hsize=\author@bx@wd\def\and{\par}%
|
|
\global\setbox\author@bx=\vtop{\if@ACM@sigchiamode\else\centering\fi
|
|
\@authorfont\@currentauthors\par\@affiliationfont
|
|
\@currentaffiliation}\egroup
|
|
\box\author@bx\hspace{\author@bx@sep}%
|
|
\gdef\@currentauthors{}%
|
|
\gdef\@currentaffiliation{}}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@mkauthors@iii}
|
|
% \changes{v1.15}{2016/07/04}{New authors system}
|
|
% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/28}{Added obeypunctuation code}
|
|
% \changes{v1.36}{2017/05/12}{Added authorsperrow overrride}
|
|
% The |sigconf| version. Here we use a centered design with each
|
|
% author in a separate box.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@mkauthors@iii{%
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
% First, we need to determine the design of the author strip. The
|
|
% boxes are separated by \cs{author@bx@sep} plus two
|
|
% \cs{author@bx@sep} margins. This means that each box must be of
|
|
% width $(\cs{textwidth}-\cs{author@bx@sep})/N-\cs{author@bx@sep}$,
|
|
% where $N$ is the number of boxes per row.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\author@bx@wd=\textwidth\relax
|
|
\advance\author@bx@wd by -\author@bx@sep\relax
|
|
\ifnum\@ACM@authorsperrow>0\relax
|
|
\divide\author@bx@wd by \@ACM@authorsperrow\relax
|
|
\else
|
|
\ifcase\num@authorgroups
|
|
\relax % 0?
|
|
\or % 1=one author per row
|
|
\or % 2=two authors per row
|
|
\divide\author@bx@wd by \num@authorgroups\relax
|
|
\or % 3=three authors per row
|
|
\divide\author@bx@wd by \num@authorgroups\relax
|
|
\or % 4=two authors per row (!)
|
|
\divide\author@bx@wd by 2\relax
|
|
\else % three authors per row
|
|
\divide\author@bx@wd by 3\relax
|
|
\fi
|
|
\fi
|
|
\advance\author@bx@wd by -\author@bx@sep\relax
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
% Now, parsing of \cs{addresses}:
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\gdef\@currentauthors{}%
|
|
\gdef\@currentaffiliation{}%
|
|
\def\@author##1{\ifx\@currentauthors\@empty
|
|
\gdef\@currentauthors{\par##1}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\g@addto@macro\@currentauthors{\par##1}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\gdef\and{}}%
|
|
\def\email##1##2{\ifx\@currentaffiliation\@empty
|
|
\gdef\@currentaffiliation{\nolinkurl{##2}}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\g@addto@macro\@currentaffiliation{\par\nolinkurl{##2}}%
|
|
\fi}%
|
|
\def\affiliation##1##2{\ifx\@currentaffiliation\@empty
|
|
\gdef\@currentaffiliation{%
|
|
\setkeys{@ACM@affiliation@}{obeypunctuation=false}%
|
|
\setkeys{@ACM@affiliation@}{##1}##2}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\g@addto@macro\@currentaffiliation{\par
|
|
\setkeys{@ACM@affiliation@}{obeypunctuation=false}%
|
|
\setkeys{@ACM@affiliation@}{##1}##2}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\global\let\and\@typeset@author@bx
|
|
}%
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
% Actual typesetting is done by the \cs{and} macro:
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\hsize=\textwidth
|
|
\global\setbox\mktitle@bx=\vbox{\noindent
|
|
\box\mktitle@bx\par\medskip\leavevmode
|
|
\lineskip=1pc\relax\centering\hspace*{-1em}%
|
|
\addresses\let\and\@typeset@author@bx\and\par\bigskip}}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@mkauthors@iv}
|
|
% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/28}{Added obeypunctuation code}
|
|
% \changes{v1.36}{2017/05/12}{Added authorsperrow overrride}
|
|
% The |sigchi-a| version. We put authors in the main text with
|
|
% no more than 2 authors per line, unless overriden.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@mkauthors@iv{%
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
% First, we need to determine the design of the author strip. The
|
|
% boxes are separated by \cs{author@bx@sep} plus two
|
|
% \cs{author@bx@sep} margins. This means that each box must be of
|
|
% width $(\cs{textwidth}-\cs{author@bx@sep})/N-\cs{author@bx@sep}$,
|
|
% where $N$ is the number of boxes per row.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\author@bx@wd=\columnwidth\relax
|
|
\advance\author@bx@wd by -\author@bx@sep\relax
|
|
\ifnum\@ACM@authorsperrow>0\relax
|
|
\divide\author@bx@wd by \@ACM@authorsperrow\relax
|
|
\else
|
|
\ifcase\num@authorgroups
|
|
\relax % 0?
|
|
\or % 1=one author per row
|
|
\else % 2=two authors per row
|
|
\divide\author@bx@wd by 2\relax
|
|
\fi
|
|
\fi
|
|
\advance\author@bx@wd by -\author@bx@sep\relax
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
% Now, parsing of \cs{addresses}:
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\gdef\@currentauthors{}%
|
|
\gdef\@currentaffiliation{}%
|
|
\def\@author##1{\ifx\@currentauthors\@empty
|
|
\gdef\@currentauthors{\par##1}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\g@addto@macro\@currentauthors{\par##1}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\gdef\and{}}%
|
|
\def\email##1##2{\ifx\@currentaffiliation\@empty
|
|
\gdef\@currentaffiliation{\nolinkurl{##2}}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\g@addto@macro\@currentaffiliation{\par\nolinkurl{##2}}%
|
|
\fi}%
|
|
\def\affiliation##1##2{\ifx\@currentaffiliation\@empty
|
|
\gdef\@currentaffiliation{%
|
|
\setkeys{@ACM@affiliation@}{obeypunctuation=false}%
|
|
\setkeys{@ACM@affiliation@}{##1}##2}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\g@addto@macro\@currentaffiliation{\par
|
|
\setkeys{@ACM@affiliation@}{obeypunctuation=false}%
|
|
\setkeys{@ACM@affiliation@}{##1}##2}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\global\let\and\@typeset@author@bx}%
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
% Actual typesetting is done by the \cs{and} macro
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\bgroup\hsize=\columnwidth
|
|
\par\raggedright\leftskip=\z@
|
|
\lineskip=1pc\noindent
|
|
\addresses\let\and\@typeset@author@bx\and\par\bigskip\egroup}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@mkauthorsaddresses}
|
|
% \changes{v1.46}{2017/08/27}{Introduced macro}
|
|
% Typesetting authors' addresses in the footnote style
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@mkauthorsaddresses{%
|
|
\ifnum\num@authors>1\relax
|
|
Authors' \else Author's \fi
|
|
\ifnum\num@authorgroups>1\relax
|
|
addresses: \else address: \fi
|
|
\bgroup
|
|
\def\streetaddress##1{\unskip\@addpunct, ##1}%
|
|
\def\postcode##1{\unskip\@addpunct, ##1}%
|
|
\def\position##1{\unskip\ignorespaces}%
|
|
\def\institution##1{\unskip\@addpunct, ##1}%
|
|
\def\city##1{\unskip\@addpunct, ##1}%
|
|
\def\state##1{\unskip\@addpunct, ##1}%
|
|
\renewcommand\department[2][0]{\unskip\@addpunct, ##2}%
|
|
\def\country##1{\unskip\@addpunct, ##1}%
|
|
\def\and{\unskip\@addpunct; }%
|
|
\def\@author##1{##1}%
|
|
\def\email##1##2{\unskip\@addpunct, \nolinkurl{##2}}%
|
|
\addresses
|
|
\egroup}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@setaddresses}
|
|
% This is an |amsart| macro that we do not need.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@setaddresses{}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@authornotemark}
|
|
% Adding a footnote mark to authors. This version adds a ``normal''
|
|
% footnote mark.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@authornotemark{\g@addto@macro\@currentauthors{\footnotemark\relax}}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@@authornotemark}
|
|
% \changes{v1.39}{2017/05/14}{Added macro}
|
|
% Adding a footnote mark to authors with a given number
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@@authornotemark#1{\g@addto@macro\@currentauthors{\footnotemark[#1]}}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@mkteasers}
|
|
% Typesetting the teasers
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@mkteasers{%
|
|
\ifx\@teaserfigures\@empty\else
|
|
\def\@teaser##1{\par\bigskip\bgroup
|
|
\captionsetup{type=figure}##1\egroup\par}
|
|
\global\setbox\mktitle@bx=\vbox{\noindent\box\mktitle@bx\par
|
|
\noindent\@teaserfigures\par\medskip}%
|
|
\fi}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@mkabstract}
|
|
% \changes{v1.19}{2016/07/28}{Include 'Abstract' in PDF bookmarks
|
|
% (Matthew Fluet)}
|
|
% \changes{v1.20}{2016/08/03}{Deleted spurious space}
|
|
% \changes{v1.29}{2017/01/22}{Removed spurious indentation (John
|
|
% Wickerson)}
|
|
% \changes{v1.48}{2017/09/16}{Removed spurious indentation if abstract
|
|
% is followed by an empty line}
|
|
% Typesetting the abstract
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@mkabstract{\bgroup
|
|
\ifx\@abstract\@lempty\else
|
|
{\phantomsection\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Abstract}%
|
|
\if@ACM@journal
|
|
\everypar{\setbox\z@\lastbox\everypar{}}\small
|
|
\else
|
|
\section*{Abstract}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\ignorespaces\@abstract\par}%
|
|
\fi\egroup}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@mkbibcitation}
|
|
% \changes{v1.17}{2016/07/10}{Changed format for sigs}
|
|
% \changes{v1.17}{2016/07/10}{Added \cs{nobreak}}
|
|
% \changes{v1.31}{2017/03/04}{Disabled linebreak}
|
|
% \changes{v1.34}{2017/04/09}{Deleted DOI from doi numbers}
|
|
% \changes{v1.44}{2017/07/30}{If the paper has just one page, use
|
|
% `page' instead of `pages'}
|
|
% \changes{v1.46}{2017/08/25}{Added subtitle}
|
|
% Print the |bibcitation| format
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@mkbibcitation{\bgroup
|
|
\def\@pages@word{\ifnum\getrefnumber{TotPages}=1\relax page\else pages\fi}%
|
|
\def\footnotemark{}%
|
|
\def\\{\unskip{} \ignorespaces}%
|
|
\def\footnote{\ClassError{\@classname}{Please do note use footnotes
|
|
inside a \string\title{} or \string\author{} command! Use
|
|
\string\titlenote{} or \string\authornote{} instead!}}%
|
|
\def\@article@string{\ifx\@acmArticle\@empty{\ }\else,
|
|
Article~\@acmArticle\ \fi}%
|
|
\par\medskip\small\noindent{\bfseries ACM Reference Format:}\par\nobreak
|
|
\noindent\authors. \@acmYear. \@title
|
|
\ifx\@subtitle\@empty. \else: \@subtitle. \fi
|
|
\if@ACM@journal
|
|
\textit{\@journalNameShort}
|
|
\@acmVolume, \@acmNumber \@article@string (\@acmPubDate),
|
|
\ref{TotPages}~\@pages@word.
|
|
\else
|
|
In \textit{\@acmBooktitle}%
|
|
\ifx\@acmEditors\@empty\textit{.}\else
|
|
\andify\@acmEditors\textit{, }\@acmEditors~\@editorsAbbrev.%
|
|
\fi\
|
|
ACM, New York, NY, USA%
|
|
\@article@string\unskip, \ref{TotPages}~\@pages@word.
|
|
\fi
|
|
\ifx\@acmDOI\@empty\else\@formatdoi{\@acmDOI}\fi
|
|
\par\egroup}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@printendtopmatter}
|
|
% \changes{v1.46}{2017/08/28}{Made it \cs{par}\cs{bigskip} uniformly}
|
|
% End the top matter
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@printendtopmatter{\par\bigskip}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@setthanks}
|
|
% We redefine \cs{\@setthanks} using \cs{long}
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@setthanks{\long\def\thanks##1{\par##1\@addpunct.}\thankses}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@setauthorsaddresses}
|
|
% \changes{v1.46}{2018/08/25}{Introduced macro}
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@setauthorsaddresses{\@authorsaddresses\unskip\@addpunct.}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
%\subsection{Headers and Footers}
|
|
%\label{sec:head_foot}
|
|
%
|
|
% We use |fancyhdr| for our headers and footers:
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\RequirePackage{fancyhdr}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\ACM@linecount@bx}
|
|
% \changes{v1.34}{2017/04/10}{Rulers now are continuous}
|
|
% \changes{v1.40}{2017/05/27}{Work around a bug in xcolor: looks like
|
|
% cmyk colors in boxes do not work}
|
|
% \changes{v1.46}{2017/08/28}{Rearranged the code to get rid of
|
|
% spurious underfull messages (Benjamin Byholm)}
|
|
% This is the box displayed in review mode
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\if@ACM@review
|
|
\newsavebox{\ACM@linecount@bx}
|
|
\newlength\ACM@linecount@bxht
|
|
\newcount\ACM@linecount
|
|
\ACM@linecount\@ne\relax
|
|
\def\ACM@mk@linecount{%
|
|
\savebox{\ACM@linecount@bx}[4em][t]{\parbox[t]{4em}{%
|
|
\setlength{\ACM@linecount@bxht}{0pt}%
|
|
\loop{\color{red}\scriptsize\the\ACM@linecount}\\
|
|
\global\advance\ACM@linecount by \@ne
|
|
\addtolength{\ACM@linecount@bxht}{\baselineskip}%
|
|
\ifdim\ACM@linecount@bxht<\textheight\repeat
|
|
{\color{red}\scriptsize\the\ACM@linecount}\hfill
|
|
\global\advance\ACM@linecount by \@ne}}}
|
|
\fi
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\ACM@linecountL}
|
|
% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/29}{Renamed macro}
|
|
% \changes{v1.34}{2017/04/10}{Rulers now are continuous}
|
|
% How to display the box on the left
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\ACM@linecountL{%
|
|
\if@ACM@review
|
|
\ACM@mk@linecount
|
|
\begin{picture}(0,0)%
|
|
\put(-26,-22){\usebox{\ACM@linecount@bx}}%
|
|
\end{picture}%
|
|
\fi}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\ACM@linecountR}
|
|
% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/29}{Added macro}
|
|
% \changes{v1.34}{2017/04/10}{Rulers now are continuous}
|
|
% How to display the box on the right
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\ACM@linecountR{%
|
|
\if@ACM@review
|
|
\ACM@mk@linecount
|
|
\begin{picture}(0,0)%
|
|
\put(20,-22){\usebox{\ACM@linecount@bx}}%
|
|
\end{picture}%
|
|
\fi}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\ACM@timestamp}
|
|
% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/10}{Added macro (Michael D.~Adams)}
|
|
% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/28}{Added current page number}
|
|
% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/29}{Added submission id}
|
|
% \changes{v1.48}{2017/09/16}{Fromatting change (Michael D.~Adams)}
|
|
% The timestamp system
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\if@ACM@timestamp
|
|
% Subtracting 30 from \time gives us the effect of rounding down despite
|
|
% \numexpr rounding to nearest
|
|
\newcounter{ACM@time@hours}
|
|
\setcounter{ACM@time@hours}{\numexpr (\time - 30) / 60 \relax}
|
|
\newcounter{ACM@time@minutes}
|
|
\setcounter{ACM@time@minutes}{\numexpr \time - \theACM@time@hours * 60 \relax}
|
|
\newcommand\ACM@timestamp{%
|
|
\footnotesize%
|
|
\ifx\@acmSubmissionID\@empty\relax\else
|
|
Submission ID: \@acmSubmissionID.{ }%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\the\year-\two@digits{\the\month}-\two@digits{\the\day}{ }%
|
|
\two@digits{\theACM@time@hours}:\two@digits{\theACM@time@minutes}{. }%
|
|
Page \thepage\ of \@startPage--\pageref*{TotPages}.%
|
|
}
|
|
\fi
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@shortauthors}
|
|
% \changes{v1.15}{2016/07/04}{Introduced macro}
|
|
% Even if the author redefined \cs{shortauthors}, we do not print
|
|
% it in the headers when in anonymous mode:
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@shortauthors{\if@ACM@anonymous Anon.\else\shortauthors\fi}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@headfootfont}
|
|
% \changes{v1.16}{2016/07/07}{Added macro}
|
|
% \changes{v1.48}{2017/09/16}{Deleted unnecessary switch (Michael D.~Adams)}
|
|
% The font to typeset header and footer text.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@headfootfont{\sffamily}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{standardpagestyle}
|
|
% \changes{v1.10}{2016/05/22}{Reversed folios location}
|
|
% \changes{v1.13}{2016/06/06}{Suppressed folios if sig}
|
|
% \changes{v1.13}{2016/06/06}{Added headers for sigs}
|
|
% \changes{v1.13}{2016/06/06}{Expanded headers for sigchi-a}
|
|
% \changes{v1.15}{2016/07/04}{Better handling of anonymous mode}
|
|
% \changes{v1.16}{2016/07/07}{Customize header/footer text font}
|
|
% \changes{v1.17}{2016/07/10}{Added paper title to sigs}
|
|
% \changes{v1.29}{2017/01/22}{Corrected printfolios (Matthew Fluet)}
|
|
% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/10}{Added timestamp (Michael D.~Adams)}
|
|
% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/29}{Added right linecount for two-column formats}
|
|
% The page style for all pages but the first one
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\fancypagestyle{standardpagestyle}{%
|
|
\fancyhf{}%
|
|
\renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{\z@}%
|
|
\renewcommand{\footrulewidth}{\z@}%
|
|
\ifcase\ACM@format@nr
|
|
\relax % manuscript
|
|
\fancyhead[LE]{\ACM@linecountL\if@ACM@printfolios\thepage\fi}%
|
|
\fancyhead[RO]{\if@ACM@printfolios\thepage\fi}%
|
|
\fancyhead[RE]{\@shortauthors}%
|
|
\fancyhead[LO]{\ACM@linecountL\shorttitle}%
|
|
\fancyfoot[RO,LE]{\footnotesize Manuscript submitted to ACM}%
|
|
\or % acmsmall
|
|
\fancyhead[LE]{\ACM@linecountL\@headfootfont\@acmArticle\if@ACM@printfolios:\thepage\fi}%
|
|
\fancyhead[RO]{\@headfootfont\@acmArticle\if@ACM@printfolios:\thepage\fi}%
|
|
\fancyhead[RE]{\@headfootfont\@shortauthors}%
|
|
\fancyhead[LO]{\ACM@linecountL\@headfootfont\shorttitle}%
|
|
\fancyfoot[RO,LE]{\footnotesize \@journalName, Vol. \@acmVolume, No.
|
|
\@acmNumber, Article \@acmArticle. Publication date: \@acmPubDate.}%
|
|
\or % acmlarge
|
|
\fancyhead[LE]{\ACM@linecountL\@headfootfont
|
|
\@acmArticle\if@ACM@printfolios:\thepage\fi\quad\textbullet\quad\@shortauthors}%
|
|
\fancyhead[LO]{\ACM@linecountL}%
|
|
\fancyhead[RO]{\@headfootfont
|
|
\shorttitle\quad\textbullet\quad\@acmArticle\if@ACM@printfolios:\thepage\fi}%
|
|
\fancyfoot[RO,LE]{\footnotesize \@journalName, Vol. \@acmVolume, No.
|
|
\@acmNumber, Article \@acmArticle. Publication date: \@acmPubDate.}%
|
|
\or % acmtog
|
|
\fancyhead[LE]{\ACM@linecountL\@headfootfont
|
|
\@acmArticle\if@ACM@printfolios:\thepage\fi\quad\textbullet\quad\@shortauthors}%
|
|
\fancyhead[LO]{\ACM@linecountL}%
|
|
\fancyhead[RE]{\ACM@linecountR}%
|
|
\fancyhead[RO]{\@headfootfont
|
|
\shorttitle\quad\textbullet\quad\@acmArticle\if@ACM@printfolios:\thepage\fi\ACM@linecountR}%
|
|
\fancyfoot[RO,LE]{\footnotesize \@journalName, Vol. \@acmVolume, No.
|
|
\@acmNumber, Article \@acmArticle. Publication date: \@acmPubDate.}%
|
|
\else % Proceedings
|
|
\fancyfoot[C]{\if@ACM@printfolios\footnotesize\thepage\fi}%
|
|
\fancyhead[LO]{\ACM@linecountL\@headfootfont\shorttitle}%
|
|
\fancyhead[RE]{\@headfootfont\@shortauthors\ACM@linecountR}%
|
|
\fancyhead[LE]{\ACM@linecountL\@headfootfont\acmConference@shortname,
|
|
\acmConference@date, \acmConference@venue}%
|
|
\fancyhead[RO]{\@headfootfont\acmConference@shortname,
|
|
\acmConference@date, \acmConference@venue\ACM@linecountR}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\if@ACM@sigchiamode
|
|
\fancyheadoffset[L]{\dimexpr(\marginparsep+\marginparwidth)}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\if@ACM@timestamp
|
|
\fancyfoot[LO,RE]{\ACM@timestamp}
|
|
\fi
|
|
}
|
|
\pagestyle{standardpagestyle}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@folio@wd}
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@folio@ht}
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@folio@voffset}
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@folio@max}
|
|
% Folio blob width, height, offsets and max number
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\newdimen\@folio@wd
|
|
\@folio@wd=\z@
|
|
\newdimen\@folio@ht
|
|
\@folio@ht=\z@
|
|
\newdimen\@folio@voffset
|
|
\@folio@voffset=\z@
|
|
\def\@folio@max{1}
|
|
\ifcase\ACM@format@nr
|
|
\relax % manuscript
|
|
\or % acmsmall
|
|
\@folio@wd=45.75pt\relax
|
|
\@folio@ht=1.25in\relax
|
|
\@folio@voffset=.2in\relax
|
|
\def\@folio@max{8}
|
|
\or % acmlarge
|
|
\@folio@wd=43.25pt\relax
|
|
\@folio@ht=79pt\relax
|
|
\@folio@voffset=.55in\relax
|
|
\def\@folio@max{10}
|
|
\fi
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@folioblob}
|
|
% \changes{v1.44}{2017/08/11}{Suppress the blob if acmArticleSeq is empty}
|
|
% \changes{v1.45}{2017/08/15}{Switched \cs{bfeseries}\cs{sffamily} to
|
|
% \cs{sffamily}\cs{bfseries}}
|
|
% The macro to typeset the folio blob.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@folioblob{\@tempcnta=0\@acmArticleSeq\relax
|
|
\ifnum\@tempcnta=0\relax\else
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
% First, we calculate \cs{@acmArticleSeq} modulo \cs{@folio@max}
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\loop
|
|
\ifnum\@tempcnta>\@folio@max\relax
|
|
\advance\@tempcnta by - \@folio@max
|
|
\repeat
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\advance\@tempcnta by -1\relax
|
|
\@tempdima=\@folio@ht\relax
|
|
\multiply\@tempdima by \the\@tempcnta\relax
|
|
\advance\@tempdima by -\@folio@voffset\relax
|
|
\begin{picture}(0,0)
|
|
\makebox[\z@]{\raisebox{-\@tempdima}{%
|
|
\rlap{%
|
|
\raisebox{-0.45\@folio@ht}[\z@][\z@]{%
|
|
\rule{\@folio@wd}{\@folio@ht}}}%
|
|
\parbox{\@folio@wd}{%
|
|
\centering
|
|
\textcolor{white}{\LARGE\sffamily\bfseries\@acmArticle}}}}
|
|
\end{picture}\fi}
|
|
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{firstpagestyle}
|
|
% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/10}{Added timestamp (Michael D.~Adams)}
|
|
% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/29}{Added right linecount for two-column formats}
|
|
% The page style for the first page only.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\fancypagestyle{firstpagestyle}{%
|
|
\fancyhf{}%
|
|
\renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{\z@}%
|
|
\renewcommand{\footrulewidth}{\z@}%
|
|
\ifcase\ACM@format@nr
|
|
\relax % manuscript
|
|
\fancyhead[L]{\ACM@linecountL}%
|
|
\fancyfoot[RO,LE]{\if@ACM@printfolios\small\thepage\fi}%
|
|
\fancyfoot[RE,LO]{\footnotesize Manuscript submitted to ACM}%
|
|
\or % acmsmall
|
|
\fancyfoot[RO,LE]{\footnotesize \@journalName, Vol. \@acmVolume, No.
|
|
\@acmNumber, Article \@acmArticle. Publication date:
|
|
\@acmPubDate.}%
|
|
\fancyhead[LE]{\ACM@linecountL\@folioblob}%
|
|
\fancyhead[LO]{\ACM@linecountL}%
|
|
\fancyhead[RO]{\@folioblob}%
|
|
\fancyheadoffset[RO,LE]{0.6\@folio@wd}%
|
|
\or % acmlarge
|
|
\fancyfoot[RO,LE]{\footnotesize \@journalName, Vol. \@acmVolume, No.
|
|
\@acmNumber, Article \@acmArticle. Publication date:
|
|
\@acmPubDate.}%
|
|
\fancyhead[RO]{\@folioblob}%
|
|
\fancyhead[LE]{\ACM@linecountL\@folioblob}%
|
|
\fancyhead[LO]{\ACM@linecountL}%
|
|
\fancyheadoffset[RO,LE]{1.4\@folio@wd}%
|
|
\or % acmtog
|
|
\fancyfoot[RO,LE]{\footnotesize \@journalName, Vol. \@acmVolume, No.
|
|
\@acmNumber, Article \@acmArticle. Publication date:
|
|
\@acmPubDate.}%
|
|
\fancyhead[L]{\ACM@linecountL}%
|
|
\fancyhead[R]{\ACM@linecountR}%
|
|
\else % Conference proceedings
|
|
\fancyhead[L]{\ACM@linecountL}%
|
|
\fancyhead[R]{\ACM@linecountR}%
|
|
\fancyfoot[C]{\if@ACM@printfolios\footnotesize\thepage\fi}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\if@ACM@timestamp
|
|
\ifnum\ACM@format@nr=0\relax % Manuscript
|
|
\fancyfoot[LO,RE]{\ACM@timestamp\quad
|
|
\footnotesize Manuscript submitted to ACM}
|
|
\else
|
|
\fancyfoot[LO,RE]{\ACM@timestamp}
|
|
\fi
|
|
\fi
|
|
}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\ACM@restore@pagestyle}
|
|
% \changes{v1.44}{2017/07/30}{Added macro}
|
|
% The following code by Ross Moore protects against changes by
|
|
% the |totpages| package:
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\let\ACM@ps@plain\ps@plain
|
|
\let\ACM@ps@myheadings\ps@myheadings
|
|
\let\ACM@ps@headings\ps@headings
|
|
\def\ACM@restore@pagestyle{%
|
|
\let\ps@plain\ACM@ps@plain
|
|
\let\ps@myheadings\ACM@ps@myheadings
|
|
\let\ps@headings\ACM@ps@headings}
|
|
\AtBeginDocument{\ACM@restore@pagestyle}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
%\subsection{Sectioning}
|
|
%\label{sec:sectioninng}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% Sectioning is different for different levels
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\renewcommand\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}%
|
|
{-.75\baselineskip \@plus -2\p@ \@minus -.2\p@}%
|
|
{.25\baselineskip}%
|
|
{\@secfont}}
|
|
\renewcommand\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}%
|
|
{-.75\baselineskip \@plus -2\p@ \@minus -.2\p@}%
|
|
{.25\baselineskip}%
|
|
{\@subsecfont}}
|
|
\renewcommand\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{10pt}%
|
|
{-.5\baselineskip \@plus -2\p@ \@minus -.2\p@}%
|
|
{-3.5\p@}%
|
|
{\@subsubsecfont\@adddotafter}}
|
|
\renewcommand\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{\parindent}%
|
|
{-.5\baselineskip \@plus -2\p@ \@minus -.2\p@}%
|
|
{-3.5\p@}%
|
|
{\@parfont\@adddotafter}}
|
|
\renewcommand\part{\@startsection{part}{9}{\z@}%
|
|
{-10\p@ \@plus -4\p@ \@minus -2\p@}%
|
|
{4\p@}%
|
|
{\@parfont}}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\section@raggedright}
|
|
% \changes{v1.12}{2016/05/30}{Introduced macro}%
|
|
% Special version of \cs{raggedright} compatible with
|
|
% \cs{MakeUppercase}
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\section@raggedright{\@rightskip\@flushglue
|
|
\rightskip\@rightskip
|
|
\leftskip\z@skip
|
|
\parindent\z@}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@secfont}
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@subsecfont}
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@subsubsecfont}
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@parfont}
|
|
% \changes{v1.12}{2016/05/30}{Moved to \cs{section@raggedright}}%
|
|
% \changes{v1.40}{2017/06/04}{Switched to MakeTextUppercase}
|
|
% \changes{v1.45}{2017/08/15}{Switched \cs{bfeseries}\cs{sffamily} to
|
|
% \cs{sffamily}\cs{bfseries}}
|
|
% Fonts for sections etc. are different for different formats.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@secfont{\sffamily\bfseries\section@raggedright\MakeTextUppercase}
|
|
\def\@subsecfont{\sffamily\bfseries\section@raggedright}
|
|
\def\@subsubsecfont{\sffamily\itshape}
|
|
\def\@parfont{\itshape}
|
|
\setcounter{secnumdepth}{3}
|
|
\ifcase\ACM@format@nr
|
|
\relax % manuscript
|
|
\or % acmsmall
|
|
\or % acmlarge
|
|
\def\@secfont{\sffamily\large\section@raggedright\MakeTextUppercase}
|
|
\def\@subsecfont{\sffamily\large\section@raggedright}
|
|
\or % acmtog
|
|
\def\@secfont{\sffamily\large\section@raggedright\MakeTextUppercase}
|
|
\def\@subsecfont{\sffamily\large\section@raggedright}
|
|
\or % sigconf
|
|
\def\@secfont{\bfseries\Large\section@raggedright\MakeTextUppercase}
|
|
\def\@subsecfont{\bfseries\Large\section@raggedright}
|
|
\or % siggraph
|
|
\def\@secfont{\sffamily\bfseries\Large\section@raggedright\MakeTextUppercase}
|
|
\def\@subsecfont{\sffamily\bfseries\Large\section@raggedright}
|
|
\or % sigplan
|
|
\def\@secfont{\bfseries\Large\section@raggedright}
|
|
\def\@subsecfont{\bfseries\section@raggedright}
|
|
\renewcommand\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}%
|
|
{-.75\baselineskip \@plus -2\p@ \@minus -.2\p@}%
|
|
{.25\baselineskip}%
|
|
{\@subsubsecfont}}
|
|
\def\@subsubsecfont{\bfseries\section@raggedright}
|
|
\renewcommand\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{\z@}%
|
|
{-.5\baselineskip \@plus -2\p@ \@minus -.2\p@}%
|
|
{-3.5\p@}%
|
|
{\@parfont\@addspaceafter}}
|
|
\def\@parfont{\bfseries\itshape}
|
|
\renewcommand\subparagraph{\@startsection{subparagraph}{5}{\z@}%
|
|
{-.5\baselineskip \@plus -2\p@ \@minus -.2\p@}%
|
|
{-3.5\p@}%
|
|
{\@subparfont\@addspaceafter}}
|
|
\def\@subparfont{\itshape}
|
|
\or % sigchi
|
|
\setcounter{secnumdepth}{1}
|
|
\def\@secfont{\sffamily\bfseries\section@raggedright\MakeTextUppercase}
|
|
\def\@subsecfont{\sffamily\bfseries\section@raggedright}
|
|
\or % sigchi-a
|
|
\setcounter{secnumdepth}{0}
|
|
\def\@secfont{\sffamily\bfseries\section@raggedright\MakeTextUppercase}
|
|
\def\@subsecfont{\sffamily\bfseries\section@raggedright}
|
|
\fi
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@adddotafter}
|
|
% Add punctuation after a sectioning command
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@adddotafter#1{#1\@addpunct{.}}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@addspaceafter}
|
|
% Add space after a sectioning command
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@addspaceafter#1{#1\@addpunct{\enspace}}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
%\subsection{TOC lists}
|
|
%\label{sec:tocs}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@dotsep}
|
|
% Related to the \cs{tableofcontents} are all the horizontal fillers. Base
|
|
% \LaTeX\ defines \cs{@dottedtocline}, which we should not disable. Yet, this
|
|
% command expects \cs{@dotsep} to be defined but leaves this to the class
|
|
% implementation. Since |amsart| does not provide this, we copy the standard
|
|
% variant from |article| here.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\providecommand*\@dotsep{4.5}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
%\subsection{Theorems}
|
|
%\label{sec:theorems}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@acmplainbodyfont}
|
|
% The font to typeset the body of the |acmplain| theorem style.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@acmplainbodyfont{\itshape}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@acmplainindent}
|
|
% The amount to indent the |acmplain| theorem style.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@acmplainindent{\parindent}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@acmplainheadfont}
|
|
% The font to typeset the head of the |acmplain| theorem style.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@acmplainheadfont{\scshape}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@acmplainnotefont}
|
|
% The font to typeset the note of the |acmplain| theorem style.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@acmplainnotefont{\@empty}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% Customization of the |acmplain| theorem style:
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\ifcase\ACM@format@nr
|
|
\relax % manuscript
|
|
\or % acmsmall
|
|
\or % acmlarge
|
|
\or % acmtog
|
|
\or % sigconf
|
|
\or % siggraph
|
|
\or % sigplan
|
|
\def\@acmplainbodyfont{\itshape}
|
|
\def\@acmplainindent{\z@}
|
|
\def\@acmplainheadfont{\bfseries}
|
|
\def\@acmplainnotefont{\normalfont}
|
|
\or % sigchi
|
|
\or % sigchi-a
|
|
\fi
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{acmplain}
|
|
% The |acmplain| theorem style
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\newtheoremstyle{acmplain}%
|
|
{.5\baselineskip\@plus.2\baselineskip
|
|
\@minus.2\baselineskip}% space above
|
|
{.5\baselineskip\@plus.2\baselineskip
|
|
\@minus.2\baselineskip}% space below
|
|
{\@acmplainbodyfont}% body font
|
|
{\@acmplainindent}% indent amount
|
|
{\@acmplainheadfont}% head font
|
|
{.}% punctuation after head
|
|
{.5em}% spacing after head
|
|
{\thmname{#1}\thmnumber{ #2}\thmnote{ {\@acmplainnotefont(#3)}}}% head spec
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@acmdefinitionbodyfont}
|
|
% The font to typeset the body of the |acmdefinition| theorem style.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@acmdefinitionbodyfont{\normalfont}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@acmdefinitionindent}
|
|
% The amount to indent the |acmdefinition| theorem style.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@acmdefinitionindent{\parindent}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@acmdefinitionheadfont}
|
|
% The font to typeset the head of the |acmdefinition| theorem style.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@acmdefinitionheadfont{\itshape}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@acmdefinitionnotefont}
|
|
% The font to typeset the note of the |acmdefinition| theorem style.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@acmdefinitionnotefont{\@empty}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% Customization of the |acmdefinition| theorem style:
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\ifcase\ACM@format@nr
|
|
\relax % manuscript
|
|
\or % acmsmall
|
|
\or % acmlarge
|
|
\or % acmtog
|
|
\or % sigconf
|
|
\or % siggraph
|
|
\or % sigplan
|
|
\def\@acmdefinitionbodyfont{\normalfont}
|
|
\def\@acmdefinitionindent{\z@}
|
|
\def\@acmdefinitionheadfont{\bfseries}
|
|
\def\@acmdefinitionnotefont{\normalfont}
|
|
\or % sigchi
|
|
\or % sigchi-a
|
|
\fi
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{acmdefinition}
|
|
% The |acmdefinition| theorem style
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\newtheoremstyle{acmdefinition}%
|
|
{.5\baselineskip\@plus.2\baselineskip
|
|
\@minus.2\baselineskip}% space above
|
|
{.5\baselineskip\@plus.2\baselineskip
|
|
\@minus.2\baselineskip}% space below
|
|
{\@acmdefinitionbodyfont}% body font
|
|
{\@acmdefinitionindent}% indent amount
|
|
{\@acmdefinitionheadfont}% head font
|
|
{.}% punctuation after head
|
|
{.5em}% spacing after head
|
|
{\thmname{#1}\thmnumber{ #2}\thmnote{ {\@acmdefinitionnotefont(#3)}}}% head spec
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% Make |acmplain| the default theorem style.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\theoremstyle{acmplain}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% Delay defining the theorem environments until after other packages
|
|
% have been loaded. In particular, the |cleveref| package must be
|
|
% loaded before the theorem environments are defined in order to show
|
|
% the correct environment name (see
|
|
% \url{https://github.com/borisveytsman/acmart/issues/138}). The |acmthm|
|
|
% option is used to suppress the definition of any theorem
|
|
% environments. Also, to avoid obscure errors arising from these
|
|
% environment definitions conflicting with environments defined by the
|
|
% user or by user-loaded packages, we only define environments that
|
|
% have not yet been defined.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\AtEndPreamble{%
|
|
\if@ACM@acmthm
|
|
\theoremstyle{acmplain}
|
|
\@ifundefined{theorem}{%
|
|
\newtheorem{theorem}{Theorem}[section]
|
|
}{}
|
|
\@ifundefined{conjecture}{%
|
|
\newtheorem{conjecture}[theorem]{Conjecture}
|
|
}{}
|
|
\@ifundefined{proposition}{%
|
|
\newtheorem{proposition}[theorem]{Proposition}
|
|
}{}
|
|
\@ifundefined{lemma}{%
|
|
\newtheorem{lemma}[theorem]{Lemma}
|
|
}{}
|
|
\@ifundefined{corollary}{%
|
|
\newtheorem{corollary}[theorem]{Corollary}
|
|
}{}
|
|
\theoremstyle{acmdefinition}
|
|
\@ifundefined{example}{%
|
|
\newtheorem{example}[theorem]{Example}
|
|
}{}
|
|
\@ifundefined{definition}{%
|
|
\newtheorem{definition}[theorem]{Definition}
|
|
}{}
|
|
\fi
|
|
\theoremstyle{acmplain}
|
|
}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@proofnamefont}
|
|
% The font to typeset the proof name.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@proofnamefont{\scshape}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\@proofindent}
|
|
% Whether or not to indent proofs.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\@proofindent{\indent}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% Customization of the proof environment.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\ifcase\ACM@format@nr
|
|
\relax % manuscript
|
|
\or % acmsmall
|
|
\or % acmlarge
|
|
\or % acmtog
|
|
\or % sigconf
|
|
\or % siggraph
|
|
\or % sigplan
|
|
\def\@proofnamefont{\itshape}
|
|
\def\@proofindent{\noindent}
|
|
\or % sigchi
|
|
\or % sigchi-a
|
|
\fi
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{proof}
|
|
% We want some customization of the proof environment.
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\renewenvironment{proof}[1][\proofname]{\par
|
|
\pushQED{\qed}%
|
|
\normalfont \topsep6\p@\@plus6\p@\relax
|
|
\trivlist
|
|
\item[\@proofindent\hskip\labelsep
|
|
{\@proofnamefont #1\@addpunct{.}}]\ignorespaces
|
|
}{%
|
|
\popQED\endtrivlist\@endpefalse
|
|
}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
%\subsection{Acknowledgments}
|
|
%\label{sec:acks}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\acks}
|
|
% \changes{v1.19}{2016/07/28}{Include 'Acknowledgements' in PDF bookmarks
|
|
% (Matthew Fluet)}
|
|
% \changes{v1.15}{2016/07/05}{Added macro}
|
|
% This is a |comment|-like structure
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\specialcomment{acks}{%
|
|
\begingroup
|
|
\section*{Acknowledgments}
|
|
\phantomsection\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Acknowledgments}
|
|
}{%
|
|
\endgroup
|
|
}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\grantsponsor}
|
|
% \changes{v1.15}{2016/07/05}{Added macro}
|
|
% \changes{v1.17}{2016/07/10}{Renamed}
|
|
% We just typeset the name of the sponsor
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\def\grantsponsor#1#2#3{#2}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\grantnum}
|
|
% \changes{v1.15}{2016/07/05}{Added macro}
|
|
% \changes{v1.17}{2016/07/10}{Added url}
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\newcommand\grantnum[3][]{#3%
|
|
\def\@tempa{#1}\ifx\@tempa\@empty\else\space(\url{#1})\fi}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
% \subsection{Conditional typesetting}
|
|
% \label{sec:conditional}
|
|
%
|
|
% We use the |comment| package for conditional typesetting:
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\AtEndPreamble{%
|
|
\if@ACM@screen
|
|
\includecomment{screenonly}
|
|
\excludecomment{printonly}
|
|
\else
|
|
\excludecomment{screenonly}
|
|
\includecomment{printonly}
|
|
\fi
|
|
\if@ACM@anonymous
|
|
\excludecomment{anonsuppress}
|
|
\excludecomment{acks}
|
|
\else
|
|
\includecomment{anonsuppress}
|
|
\fi}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
%\subsection{Additional bibliography commands}
|
|
%\label{sec:bibliography}
|
|
%
|
|
% \begin{macro}{\showeprint}
|
|
% \changes{v1.21}{2016/09/04}{Added macro}
|
|
% The command \cs{showeprint} has two arguments: the (optional) prefix
|
|
% and the eprint number. Right now the only prefix we understand is
|
|
% the (lowercase) word `arxiv' (see
|
|
% \url{http://arxiv.org/hypertex/bibstyles/}).
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\newcommand\showeprint[2][arxiv]{%
|
|
\def\@tempa{#1}%
|
|
\ifx\@tempa\@empty\def\@tempa{arxiv}\fi
|
|
\def\@tempb{arxiv}%
|
|
\ifx\@tempa\@tempb
|
|
arXiv:\href{http://arxiv.org/abs/#2}{#2}\else arXiv:#2%
|
|
\fi}
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \end{macro}
|
|
%
|
|
%\subsection{End of Class}
|
|
%\label{end}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% \changes{v1.30}{2017/02/10}{Added \cs{frenchspacing}}
|
|
% \begin{macrocode}
|
|
\normalsize\normalfont\frenchspacing
|
|
%</class>
|
|
% \end{macrocode}
|
|
%
|
|
%\Finale
|
|
%\clearpage
|
|
%
|
|
%\PrintChanges
|
|
%\clearpage
|
|
%\PrintIndex
|
|
%
|
|
\endinput
|